2010 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2010 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M. Wheels and Tires ..... 9-43 Jump Starting ... of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division wherever

Keys, Doors andWindows ............................ 1-1

Keys and Locks .............. 1-2Doors ............................ 1-6Vehicle Security .............. 1-7Exterior Mirrors ............. 1-10Interior Mirrors .............. 1-11Windows ...................... 1-11Roof ............................ 1-13

Seats and Restraints ......... 2-1Head Restraints .............. 2-2Front Seats .................... 2-3Rear Seats .................... 2-7Safety Belts ................... 2-8Airbag System .............. 2-23Child Restraints ............. 2-37

Storage .............................. 3-1Storage Compartments .... 3-1Additional Storage

Features ..................... 3-2Roof Rack System .......... 3-5

Instruments andControls ............................. 4-1

Instrument PanelOverview .................... 4-2

Controls ......................... 4-4Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............. 4-8Vehicle Personalization ... 4-21OnStar System ............. 4-23

Lighting ............................. 5-1Exterior Lighting .............. 5-1Interior Lighting ............... 5-4Lighting Features ............ 5-5

Infotainment System ......... 6-1Introduction .................... 6-1Radio ............................ 6-4Audio Players ................. 6-9

Climate Controls ............... 7-1Climate Control Systems ... 7-1Air Vents ....................... 7-4Maintenance ................... 7-4

Driving and Operating ....... 8-1Driving Information .......... 8-2Starting and Operating ... 8-16Engine Exhaust ............. 8-23Automatic

Transmission ............. 8-24Manual Transmission ..... 8-29Drive Systems .............. 8-31Brakes ......................... 8-32Ride Control Systems .... 8-33Cruise Control ............... 8-36Fuel ............................ 8-38Towing ........................ 8-43Conversions and

Add-Ons ................... 8-50

Vehicle Care ...................... 9-1General Information ......... 9-2Vehicle Checks ............... 9-4Headlamp Aiming .......... 9-32Bulb Replacement ......... 9-33Electrical System ........... 9-37

2010 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires .......... 9-43Jump Starting ............... 9-69Towing ........................ 9-73Appearance Care .......... 9-75

Service andMaintenance ..................... 10-1

General Information ....... 10-1Scheduled

Maintenance .............. 10-3Recommended Fluids,

Lubricants, andParts ...................... 10-15

Maintenance Records ... 10-18

Technical Data ................. 11-1Vehicle Identification ...... 11-1Vehicle Data ................. 11-2

Customer Information ...... 12-1Customer Information ..... 12-1Reporting Safety

Defects ................... 12-13Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ............. 12-14

Index ................................... i-1

Introduction

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, PONTIAC, the PONTIACEmblem and the name VIBEare registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. GM reserves the rightto make changes after thattime without further notice.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Limited” for PontiacDivision wherever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be onyour specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian VehicleOwnersCanadian Owners(Propriétaires Canadiens)A French language copy ofthis manual can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123

Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20784572 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Introduction iii

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not let thishappen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things that couldhurt you or others if you were toignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle’swarranty, and it could be costly.The notice tells what to do to helpavoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

iv Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, referto the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

Introduction v

✍ NOTES

vi Introduction

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys ...................................1-2Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System .....................1-3Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System Operation .......1-3Door Locks ..........................1-5Power Door Locks .................1-6Safety Locks ........................1-6

DoorsLiftgate ................................1-6

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security ....................1-7Anti-Theft Alarm System .........1-7Immobilizer ...........................1-9Immobilizer Operation ............1-9

Exterior MirrorsPower Mirrors .....................1-10Folding Mirrors ....................1-10

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ........1-11

WindowsWindows ............................1-11Power Windows ..................1-12Sun Visors .........................1-12

RoofSunroof ..............................1-13

Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition,doors, and all other locks.

The key number is on the tagattached to the key ring. Keep thistag and give it to your dealer/retailerif a new key needs to be made.

If the vehicle has an Immobilizertheft deterrent system, the key hasa transponder in the key thatmatches a decoder in the vehicle.See Immobilizer Operation onpage 1-9 for additional information.

Do not do any of the following tokeys with a transponder:

• Cover the key.

• Hit the key hard against otherobjects.

• Expose it to high temperaturesfor a long time.

• Put the key in water.

• Use the key with electromagneticmaterials.

Any new Immobilizer key must beprogrammed before it will startthe vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12-6for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement(US, Can) on page 12-16 forinformation regarding Part 15 ofthe Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andRSS-210/211 of Industry andScience Canada.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work upto 30 feet (9 m) away from thevehicle.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors and liftgate.

The hazard warning flashers flashonce to confirm that the doorshave locked.

W (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If W is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The hazardwarning flashers flash twice toconfirm that the door has unlocked.

HOLD p (Panic): Press to activatethe alarm. The lights flash andthe horn sounds. The alarm turnsoff when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN or HOLD p is pressedagain. The ignition must be inLOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORYfor the alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed. Anylost or stolen transmitters will nolonger work once the new transmitteris programmed. Each vehicle canhave up to four transmittersprogrammed to it.


Battery ReplacementThe battery in the transmitter isweak and should be changed if itdoes not work at the normal range inany location.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damagethe transmitter.

To replace the battery, usea flat, thin non-metal object ortape-wrapped metal object.

1. Separate the transmitter.

2. Remove the module.

3. Open the module cover.

4. Remove the old battery.

5. Insert the new battery,positive (+) side facing up.Replace with a CR2025 orequivalent battery.

6. Snap the module back togetherand replace it in the transmitter.

7. Snap the front and back of thetransmitter together.


Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock and unlock your vehiclefrom the outside, use your key or theRemote Keyless Entry transmitter,if equipped. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 1-3 for more information.

Open the driver door, on vehicleswith power door locks, by turning thekey in the lock toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

Turn the key back toward the centerand toward the rear again, withinthree seconds, to unlock all of thedoors. Use the key in the passengerdoor to also unlock all of the doors.

Lock a door by turning the keytoward the front of the vehicle.If you have power door locks,all the doors will lock.

To manually lock or unlock the doorfrom the inside, move the leveron the door forward or rearward.The driver and front passenger dooropen from the inside while locked.

With manual locks, the key mustbe used to lock and unlock theliftgate.


Power Door LocksOn vehicles with this feature, thepower door lock switch is located onthe armrest of the driver and frontpassenger door.

Q : Press to lock all the doors.

K : Press to unlock all the doors.

Safety LocksRear door security locks preventpassengers from opening therear doors from the inside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks.

To set these locks, slide the leverdown on each door and close it.The doors can only be opened fromoutside with the door unlocked.To return the doors to normaloperation, slide the lever up.

Doors

Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or

under the instrument panel.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8-23.

Unlock and open the liftgate byinserting the key, turning itcounterclockwise and raise itby hand.

Close the liftgate by using thehandle to pull it down.

Lock the liftgate by inserting thekey and turning it clockwise to thefirst position.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 1-3for more information.

Vehicle SecurityVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have atheft-deterrent system that activatesan alarm if attempts are made todamage or break into the vehicle.The alarm sounds and the lightsflash.


The security light is in the center ofthe instrument panel.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system:

1. Close all the doors and theliftgate.

2. Lock the doors and liftgate withthe key or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.The security light comes onsolid.

The system is armed after30 seconds and the securitylight will flash.

Unlocking the vehicle from theinside activates the system.

To avoid setting off the alarm makesure all passengers are out ofthe vehicle and the windows areclosed before arming the system.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the alarm do one of thefollowing:

• Unlock the doors with the key.

• Unlock the doors and liftgate withthe RKE transmitter.

• Start the engine.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system by closing andlocking the doors and liftgatewith the RKE transmitter.Wait until the security light isflashing.

3. Unlock the driver door fromthe inside. The system shouldactivate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described inthe disarming procedure.

5. Repeat this operation for theother doors. Check that thesystem is activated whenthe battery terminal isdisconnected and thenreconnected.

If the system does not workproperly, have it checked by yourdealer/retailer.


How the System Alarm isActivatedThe system activates the alarm if:

• A locked door or the liftgateis unlocked or opened without theRKE transmitter.

• A locked door is unlocked oropened without the key.

• The liftgate is unlocked oropened with the key.

• The battery is reconnected.

• The side windows are tapped orbroken.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement(US, Can) on page 12-16 forinformation regarding Part 15 ofthe Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andRSS-210/211 of Industry andScience Canada.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The security light is in the center ofthe instrument panel. It comeson if there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The security light flashes when thesystem is armed.

Only the correct key starts thevehicle.

If the engine does not start, therecould be a problem with thetheft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. Checkthe fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 9-38.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer/retailer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and havea new key made.


If any of the following conditionsoccur, contact your dealer/retailer.

• The security light stays on.

• The security light does not startflashing when the key isremoved from the ignition.

• The security light flashesinconsistently.

See your dealer/retailer to have anew key with a transponder made.

In an emergency, contactRoadside Assistance Program.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 12-6.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

The controls are located tothe left of the steering wheelon the instrument panel. Thevehicle must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY to adjust themirrors.

1. Adjust either mirror by pushingthe selector switch to theL (left) or R (right).

2. Use the arrows on the controlpad to adjust the direction ofthe mirror.

3. Move the selector switch back tothe center. This locks the mirrorsin place.

Folding MirrorsManually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when going throughan automatic car wash. To fold, pushthe mirror toward the vehicle. Pushthe mirror outward, to return to itsoriginal position.


Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirrorto see clearly behind the vehicle.Hold the mirror in the center tomove it up, down, and side toside. The day/night lever lets youadjust the mirror to avoid glare fromheadlamps behind your vehicle.Move the lever to the right fornighttime use and back to thecenter for daytime use.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationon the system and how to subscribeto OnStar. See OnStar® System onpage 4-23 for more information onthe services OnStar provides.

Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Manual WindowsTurn the crank on the door to openand close a manual window.


Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

On vehicles with this feature, thepower windows only work when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orin Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 8-18.

Switches on the driver door controlthe driver and passenger windows.Each passenger door has aswitch to control that window.

Press or pull the front of a switch tolower or raise a window.

AUTO (Express-Down): Press allthe way down and release to lowerthe driver window automatically. Pullup at any time to stop the windowfrom lowering.

o (Lock-Out): Press the lock-outbutton, located on the driver door,to disable the passenger powerwindows and again to enable them.

Only the driver window can beoperated when the lock-out featureis used.

Sun VisorsPull the visor toward you or move itto the side to help reduce glare.

To use the mirror, slide the attachedcover.


Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, thecontrols are on the overheadconsole. The ignition must be inON/RUN or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) for the sunroofto work.

TILT: Slide the sunshade back.Press to tilt the sunroof. Press againto stop movement at any time.

DOWN: Press to lower the sunroof.

SLIDE: Press to open the sunroof. Itexpress opens and stops before thefully open position. Press again tofully open. Press the switch at anytime to stop the sunroof from moving.If the sunshade is closed it openswith the sunroof.

CLOSE: Press to express closethe sunroof. Press again tostop movement at any time.

The sunshade must be closedby hand.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf there is an obstruction whenthe sunroof is closing, it stops andpartly opens again. Remove theobstruction and press the buttonagain to close the sunroof.


✍ NOTES


Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ....................2-2Active Head Restraints ...........2-3

Front SeatsSeat Position ........................2-3Seat Adjustment ....................2-4Reclining Seatbacks ..............2-4Folding Seatback ..................2-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats ...........................2-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts ..........................2-8How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly ............................2-12Lap-Shoulder Belt ................2-18Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy ........................2-20Safety Belt Extender ............2-21

Safety System Check ...........2-21Safety Belt Care ..................2-22Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts Aftera Crash ............................2-22

Airbag SystemAirbag System ....................2-23Where Are the Airbags? .......2-24When Should an Airbag

Inflate? .............................2-26What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? .............................2-27How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ..........................2-28What Will You See After

an Airbag Inflates? .............2-28Passenger Sensing

System .............................2-29Servicing the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....2-34Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....2-35Airbag System Check ...........2-36Replacing Airbag System

Parts After a Crash ............2-36

Child RestraintsOlder Children .....................2-37Infants and Young

Children ............................2-38Child Restraint Systems ........2-41Where to Put the

Restraint ...........................2-43Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCHSystem) ............................2-45

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash ............2-51

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) ...........2-51

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat Position) ....2-53

Seats and Restraints 2-1

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints. The rear seats haveadjustable headrests in all seatingpositions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not driveuntil the head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up toraise it.

To lower the head restraint,press the button, located on thetop of the seatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

2-2 Seats and Restraints

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

Always raise the rear center headrest at least one position when thereis a passenger seated there.

Active Head RestraintsActive Head Restraint SystemThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions. These automatically tiltforward to reduce the risk of neckinjury if the vehicle is hit from behind.

Front Seats

Seat Position

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.


Seat Adjustment

The driver seat height adjuster islocated on the outboard side of theseat. To raise or lower the seat,pull up or push down on the leverrepeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.


{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, notat your pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

On vehicles with manual recliningseatbacks the lever used to operatethem is located on the outboardside of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully, withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


Folding Seatback

{ CAUTION

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is not nearan airbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death.Secure objects away from the areain which an airbag would inflate.For more information, see WhereAre the Airbags? on page 2-24.

{ CAUTION

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

On vehicles with this feature, theseatback folds down to allow formore cargo space. When the areais not being used for more cargospace or as a temporary table, putthe seatback in the locked, uprightposition. Only adjust the seat whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Move the seat rearward.

2. Lower the head restraint to thelowest position and make surethe seatback is at the mostupright position and locked.

3. Pull up on one of the leverslocated on either side of the backof the passenger seatback.

4. Fold the seatback down.


To raise the seatback:

1. Pull up on one of the leverslocated on either side of the backof the passenger’s seatback.

2. Pull the seatback up and push itback to lock it into place. Makesure the safety belt is not twistedor caught in the seatback.

3. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it islocked into position.

4. Use the reclining front seatbacklever to adjust the seatback to acomfortable position.

Rear SeatsYou can fold either side of theseatback down. The rear right sideseatback can also be used as atemporary table while the vehicleis stopped.

{ CAUTION

A rear seatback folded forward,or any other object contacting orpressing the front seatback mayaffect the proper functioning ofthe passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2-29.

To fold either seatback down:

1. Move the front seat forwardand the seatback to the uprightposition.

2. Move the headrests all theway down.

3. Pull up on the lock release knob,located on the top outboard sideof the seatback.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

4. Fold the seatback down.


To raise the seatback:

1. Pull the seatback up andpush it back to lock it into place.The safety belts should not betwisted or caught in the seatback.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to check that it is lockedinto position.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash,you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten yoursafety belt, and check that yourpassenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.


{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 4-11 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, you donot know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not onlyin frontal collisions, but especiallyin side and other collisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of lessthan 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 2-37or Infants and Young Children onpage 2-38. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt.


If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.



A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, noton the pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.



A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if youwear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body wouldmove too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head andneck injury. Also, the belt wouldapply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong asshoulder bones. You could alsoseverely injure internal organs likeyour liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.


A: The belt is behind the body.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you would notbe restrained by the shoulder belt.Your body could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. You mightalso slide under the lap belt.The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

The buckle for the center rearpassenger position (A) hasthe word CENTER on it.Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 2-21.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the safetybelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder.The belt should be away fromthe face and neck, but not fallingoff of the shoulder. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash.


Push down on the release buttonand move the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster can bemoved up by pushing on the front ofthe height adjuster.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the button to makesure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety belt

pretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safety beltsduring the early stages of a moderateto severe frontal and near frontalcrash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met.And, if the vehicle has side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts ina side crash.

If the passenger sensing systemdetects that there is not a passengerin the right front passenger position,the safety belt pretensioner forthat position will not activate.See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2-29.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for yoursafety belt system. See ReplacingSafety Belt System Parts After aCrash on page 2-22.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.


The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information, seethe instruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

When a safety belt extender isinstalled in the right front passengersafety belt, make sure the passengerairbag status indicator displaysON. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4-13. If theindicator shows OFF, disconnectthe extender’s latch from the bucklethen reconnect the safety belt.The passenger airbag statusindicator light should be ONand then the safety belt extendercan be reconnected. If the safetybelt extender is used while thepassenger airbag status indicatorlight is OFF, the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags (if equipped) may notactivate correctly.

Always disconnect the extenderfrom the safety belt after youuse it so that the airbag will workproperly the next time someoneuses that seat.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer tohave it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 4-11 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 2-22.


Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts Aftera Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage thesafety belt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the safety beltsystems are working properly aftera crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assembliesthat were used during any crashmay have been stressed ordamaged. See your dealer/retailerto have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been ina crash, or if the airbag readinesslight stays on after you startthe vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-12.


Airbag SystemThis vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for theright front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossed inthe trim or on an attached label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce therisk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safety belts,but do not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to deployin every crash. In some crashessafety belts are your only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 2-26.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.


{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflatescan be seriously injured or killed.Do not sit unnecessarily close tothe airbag, as you would be if youwere sitting on the edge of yourseat or leaning forward. Safetybelts help keep you in positionbefore and during a crash. Alwayswear your safety belt, even withairbags. The driver should sit asfar back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults andolder children, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infantsneed the protection that a childrestraint system can provide.Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 2-37 orInfants and Young Children onpage 2-38.

There is an airbag readinesslight on the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4-12 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.


The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger’s side.

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger, they are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags forthe driver, right front passenger, andsecond row outboard passengers,they are in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or it mightforce the object into that personcausing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear. Do notput anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path ofan inflating roof-rail airbag willbe blocked.

Driver Side shown,Passenger Side similar


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or rightfront passenger head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.Frontal airbags for the driver andright front passenger may alsodeploy if a serious impact occurs tothe underside of the vehicle such ashitting a curb, falling into a deep hole,or landing hard.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.


The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 2-23.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system’sdesigned threshold level. The vehiclehas sensors which detect sideimpacts. These sensors signal theappropriate side impact airbag toinflate. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag

is intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. A roof-railairbag is intended to deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck. It ispossible that, in a crash involving therear side of your vehicle, that only theroof-mounted airbag will deploy.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehiclehits, the angle of the impact, andhow quickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.


How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body.But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 2-26 formore information.Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 2-27.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthmaor other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot getout of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problemsfollowing an airbag deployment,you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, and turn thehazard warning flashers on whenthe airbags inflate. You can lockthe doors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warning flashersoff by using the controls for thosefeatures.


In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.• Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect youin another crash. A new systemwill include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 12-14 and EventData Recorders on page 12-14.

• Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visiblein the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check is complete,either the word ON or the word

OFF will be visible depending onwhether the seat is occupied and/orthe weight of the occupant. If theseat is unoccupied, the light will notbe visible after the system check.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4-13.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system willalso turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped), andsafety belt pretensioner if it detectsthat there is no occupant in thatposition.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.


The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seatis in a forward position.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughthe airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s)are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat isunoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

• The system determines thata small child is present in abooster seat.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

• The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), the off indicator willlight and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 4-13.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult sizeis sitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbagsand pretensioner to be enabled,the on indicator will light and staylit to remind you that the airbagsand pretensioner are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped),depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.


If the airbag readiness light and theOFF light in the passenger airbagstatus indicator come on together,it may mean there is a malfunctionin the passenger sensing system.Secure the child in the child restraintin a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer/retailer.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint withthe ignition key in the ACC orLOCK position while following thedirections provided by the childrestraint manufacturer and referto Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) onpage 2-51 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 2-53.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion, ifadjustable, to make sure that thevehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seatcushion.

6. Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 2-2.

If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint ina rear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer/retailer.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow the

system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped):

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importanceof proper restraint use.A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, seatbackpacks, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passengersensing system operates. Werecommend that you not useseat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approvedby GM for your specific vehicle.See Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2-35 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.


The passenger sensing system maysuppress the airbag deploymentwhen liquid soaks into the seat.If this happens, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator and the airbag readinesslight will be lit. Have yourdealer/retailer check the system.

An object, person or child in therear seat contacting or pressingthe right front passenger seatback,or objects stowed under the rightfront passenger seat, may affect theproper functioning of the passengersensing system.

When a safety belt extender isused in the right front passengerseat, make sure the passengerairbag status indicator showsON. If the indicator shows OFF,disconnect the extender’s latch from

the buckle then reconnect the safetybelt. The passenger airbag statusindicator light should be ON andthen the safety belt extender canbe reconnected. If the safety beltextender is used while the passengerairbag status indicator light is OFF,the right front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags (ifequipped) may not activate correctly.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 12-12.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment to theAirbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument panel,roof-rail airbag modules, ceilingheadliner or pillar garnish trim,front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbagsystem.In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position,

which includes sensors thatare part of the passenger seat.The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholsteryor trim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, suchas an aftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of theseat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of thepassenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See PassengerSensing System on page 2-29.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses for

Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12-1.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.


Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 4-12 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag coveringis damaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 2-27. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system may notwork properly and may not protectyou and your passenger(s) in acrash, resulting in serious injury oreven death. To help make sureyour airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 4-12for more information.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations for

that booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatalinternal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.


{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten.Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person’sarms. An infant should be securedin an appropriate restraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle. If itis, the restraint will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.


{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up around thechild’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a bodyarea that is unprotected by anybony structure. This alone couldcause serious or fatal injuries.To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, youngchildren should always be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat


A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraintproperly in the vehicle using thevehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructionsthat came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Child Restraint Systemson page 2-41 for more information.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtaina replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the child isnot properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ CAUTION


(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though itis turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2-29 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle.Be sure to properly secure anychild restraint in the vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a child restraintthat has LATCH attachments. Thechild restraint manufacturer providesinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachmentsin the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchorsfor each LATCH seating positionthat will accommodate a childrestraint with lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

The child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether alwaysto be attached. In Canada, the lawrequires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached. Be sure toread and follow the instructions forthe child restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Rear Seat


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating positionwith lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are locatedon the floor of the rear cargo area.Open the cover to access theanchors. If the vehicle has a cargomat, you may need to fold it backto access the top tether anchors.Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraintin a position without a top tetheranchor if a national or locallaw requires that the top tetherbe attached, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraintsay that the top tether mustbe attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 2-43 for additional information.


Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others couldbe injured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.


Do not fold the empty rearseat with a safety belt buckled.This could damage the safety beltor the seat. Unbuckle and returnthe safety belt to its stowedposition, before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the lower anchors.If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the vehicle has a cargo

mat, you may need to foldit back to access thetop tether anchors.

2.3. Open the top tether anchorcover to expose the anchor.

2.4. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto the child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the seatback.


If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you areusing a dual tether, route thetether around the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route the tetherunder the headrest or headrestraint and in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.


Replacing LATCHSystem Parts After aCrash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer/retailer to have the systeminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH

System) on page 2-45 for how toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin a seating position using a safetybelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2-45 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.


If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in therear seat, be sure to read Whereto Put the Restraint on page 2-43.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.Position the release buttonon the buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2-45 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restrainton page 2-43.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 2-29 and PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 4-13for more information, includingimportant safety information.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION


(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though itis turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2-29 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2-45 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the seating position usinga safety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 2-45 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say thatthe top strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 4-13.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come onand stay on when the vehicleis started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 2-29 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box ............................3-1Cupholders ...........................3-1Front Storage .......................3-2Overhead Console .................3-2Center Console Storage .........3-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover .........................3-2Load Rails and Hooks ...........3-4Cargo Tie Downs ..................3-4Cargo Management System ....3-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack ............................3-5

StorageCompartmentsGlove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersThere are cupholders located inthe console area between the frontseats.

The cupholder size can be adjustedby changing the location of theprovided insert.

There are also cupholders that foldout from the back of the centerconsole.

There are also molded bottle holderslocated in the front and rear doors.

Storage 3-1

Front StorageThe driver storage compartmentis located near the left side of thesteering column on the bottom of theinstrument panel. Pull up on the leverto open the cover.

Overhead ConsoleIf your vehicle has an overheadconsole, push on the cover to open.

Center Console StorageTo access the center consolestorage area, pull up on the lockrelease lever to raise the upper coverand access the tray storage. Pull upon the lower release lever to raisethe tray and access more storage.

Additional StorageFeaturesCargo CoverFor vehicles equipped with acargo cover.

Using the cargo cover:

1. Remove the cargo cover from itsstorage location.

2. Unfold the cargo cover.

3. Attach the hooks to the indentedslots on the sides of the rearcargo area.

4. Attach the center hook to thecenter head restraint.

{ CAUTION

An improperly stored cargo covercould be thrown about the vehicleduring a collision or suddenmaneuver. Someone could beinjured. If the cover is removed,always store it in the properstorage location. When it isreplaced, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

3-2 Storage

Folding the Cargo Cover:

1. Hold the cargo cover with bothhands.

2. Bend one side of the covertoward the body.

3. Twist the other side in theopposite direction.

4. Make a small circle, and thenfold the cover inward.

5. Make sure the cover’s threecircles are side by side.

6. Return the cover to itsstorage bag.

Storage 3-3

Load Rails and HooksThere are hooks for hanging itemsin the cabin, luggage compartment,and in the cargo managementsystem, if the vehicle has one.

On the front passenger side, pressthe hook to open and use it. There isa weight limit of 44 lb (20 kg).

The luggage compartment hooksshould only be used to hangitems under 7 lb (3 kg).

For vehicles with a cargomanagement system, open the decklid to hang items under 5 lb (2.3 kg).

Cargo Tie DownsThe cargo tie down straps andhooks are intended to be used tosecure a flat tire or other items.The tie down hooks are located inthe rear cargo area. The straps areunder the rear floor panel.

To use, hook the end of the strapsto the hooks in a criss-cross pattern.Pull on the straps at the buckle totighten as needed.

Cargo ManagementSystemA cargo management system, forvehicles that have it, can be used fororganizing and separating itemsin the rear of the vehicle.

To use:1. Open the cover.2. Unfold the side panels out and

lock them into place to hold upthe cover.

3. Hook the nets into the coverslots to use as dividers.

There are also hooks on the insidecover to hold items.Additional storage is available onboth sides of the cargo managementsystem. Turn the knobs to theUNLOCK position, and removethe deck boards to access thestorage area.

3-4 Storage

Roof Rack System

Roof Rack

{ CAUTION

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack — like paneling,plywood, or a mattress — the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs overthe rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests evenlybetween the crossrails, makingsure to fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecross rails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s center ofgravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle to makesure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12.

Storage 3-5

✍ NOTES

3-6 Storage

Instruments andControls

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview .....4-2

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment .....4-4Steering Wheel Controls .........4-4Horn ....................................4-5Windshield Wiper/Washer .......4-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....4-6Power Outlets (Accessory

Power Outlets) .....................4-6Power Outlets (115 Volt

Alternating Current) ..............4-7Cigarette Lighter ...................4-8Ashtrays ..............................4-8

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators ...........................4-8Instrument Cluster .................4-9Speedometer ......................4-10Odometer ...........................4-10Trip Odometer .....................4-10Tachometer ........................4-10Fuel Gage ..........................4-10Engine Coolant

Temperature Gage .............4-11Safety Belt Reminders ..........4-11Airbag Readiness Light .........4-12Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ...........................4-13Charging System Light .........4-14Malfunction

Indicator Lamp ..................4-14Brake System Warning

Light ................................4-17Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light ...........4-17Service All-Wheel Drive

Light ................................4-18

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight ................................4-18

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ....4-18Traction Control System

(TCS) Warning Light ...........4-19Tire Pressure Light ..............4-19Engine Oil Pressure Light .....4-19Low Fuel Warning Light ........4-20Security Light ......................4-20High-Beam on Light .............4-20Fog Lamp Light ...................4-20Lamps on Reminder .............4-20Taillamp Indicator Light .........4-21Low Washer Fluid Warning

Light ................................4-21Cruise Control Light .............4-21Door Ajar Light ....................4-21

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization .........4-21

OnStar SystemOnStar® System ..................4-23

Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview

4-2 Instruments and Controls

The main components of theinstrument panel are the following:A. Power Mirrors on page 1-10.B. Air Vents on page 7-4.C. Turn and Lane-Change Signals

on page 5-3.D. Instrument Cluster on page 4-9.E. Windshield Wiper/Washer on

page 4-5.F. Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator on page 4-13.Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2-29. Security Lighton page 4-20.

G. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 5-3.

H. AM-FM Radio on page 6-4.I. Traction Control System (TCS) on

page 8-33.J. Anti-Theft Alarm System on

page 1-7.

K. Front Storage on page 3-2.L. Hood on page 9-5.M. Steering Wheel Controls on

page 4-4.N. Steering Wheel Adjustment on

page 4-4.O. Horn on page 4-5.P. Cruise Control on page 8-36

(If Equipped).Q. Ignition Positions on page 8-16.R. Tire Pressure Reset Button

(Out of View). See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 9-52.

S. Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating On/Off Button.See Power Outlets (AccessoryPower Outlets) on page 4-6 orPower Outlets (115 VoltAlternating Current) on page 4-7.

T. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped)or Accessory Power Outlet.Cigarette Lighter on page 4-8 orPower Outlets (Accessory PowerOutlets) on page 4-6 or PowerOutlets (115 Volt AlternatingCurrent) on page 4-7.

U. Shift Lever. AutomaticTransmission (Four SpeedAutomatic) on page 8-24 orAutomatic Transmission (FiveSpeed Automatic) on page 8-27or Manual Transmission onpage 8-29.

V. Power Outlets (Accessory PowerOutlets) on page 4-6 or PowerOutlets (115 Volt AlternatingCurrent) on page 4-7.

W. Climate Control Systems onpage 7-1.

X. Load Rails and Hooks onpage 3-4.

Y. Glove Box on page 3-1.


Controls

Steering WheelAdjustmentA tilt and telescope wheel lets thesteering wheel position be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.Pull the lever down to move thesteering wheel up or down and inor out. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.Do not adjust the tilt and telescopelever while driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel. They include the following:

− q + (Volume): Press to decreaseor increase the volume.

ª« (Next/Previous): Press toselect the next or previous radiostation, CD track, or MP3 folder.

• Press ª or « to go to the nextor previous preset station.

• Press and hold ª or « until abeep is heard to go to the nextor previous radio station. Onlystations with a strong signal willbe selected.

• Press ª or « to go to the nextor previous CD track.

• Press and hold ª or « until abeep is heard to continuously goto the next or previous track.

MODE: Press to turn the audiosystem on or to select between AM,FM, XM™ (if equipped), CD, or AUX.

Press and hold to turn the audiosystem off.


HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

z (Mist): Move the lever to mist,for a single wiping cycle and thenrelease. The wipers stop afterone wipe.

( (Off): Turns the wipers off.

& (Intermittent): Move the leverto choose a delayed wiping cycle.

For vehicles with the variableintermittent feature, the timebetween wipes can be adjusted.Turn the & band for a longeror shorter delay interval.

q (Low): Slow wipes.

l (High): Fast wipes.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If theblades are frozen to the windshield,loosen or thaw them. If they become

damaged, get new blades orblade inserts. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 9-30.

Heavy snow or ice can overloadthe wipers. A circuit breaker stopsthem until the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.The spray continues until the leveris released. The wipers will run afew times. See Washer Fluid onpage 9-24 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluid reservoir.

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.


Rear WindowWiper/Washer

Z Rear Wiper: Turn the end ofthe lever to low or high, to turnon the rear window wiper.

y (Low): Slow wipes.

x (High): Fast wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Turn the end ofthe lever up or down as far as it willgo, to spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The knob automaticallyreturns from these positions afterit is released.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 9-24.

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Power Outlets(Accessory PowerOutlets)Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cellular phone.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet on the center floorconsole below the shift lever.

To use the outlet, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Pull down thesmall cover to access the outlet.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.

Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating.

This circuit is protected by a fuseand has a maximum current level.Do not use equipment exceedingthe maximum amperage rating.

Certain power accessory plugsmay not be compatible to the poweraccessory outlet and could resultin a blown vehicle or adapter fuse.See your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the power accessoryplugs.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehicle candamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Checkwith your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.


When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from theplug because the power outletsare designed for accessory powerplugs only.

Power Outlets (115 VoltAlternating Current)Electrical equipment with amaximum limit of 115 VAC canbe plugged into this power outlet.If the equipment used requiresmore than the limit, a protection

circuit will cut the power supply.The power automatically restartswhen equipment that operateswithin the limit is plugged in.

The power outlet is located belowthe shift lever.

Before using the outlet, turn on theignition and press the button locatedon the instrument panel below theclimate control system. An indicatorlight in the button comes on. Afterusing the outlet, press the buttonagain to turn it off.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electrical equipmentand they may not work properly:

• Equipment with high initial peakwattage: cathode-ray tube typetelevisions, compressor-drivenrefrigerators, or electric powertools.

• Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply:microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.


Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a lighter, pushthe lighter down and it will pop upwhen it is ready to be used. Theignition switch must be in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition to use the lighter.

Notice: Holding a cigarettelighter in while it is heating doesnot let the lighter back away fromthe heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown.Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

It is not recommended to use thecigarette lighter to plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment. Use theaccessory power outlet for phones

and other electrical equipment. SeePower Outlets (Accessory PowerOutlets) on page 4-6 or PowerOutlets (115 Volt AlternatingCurrent) on page 4-7.

AshtraysFor vehicles with a removableashtray, it is located in the frontcupholder in the center consolestorage area.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gages and warninglights work together to indicatea problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on while driving,or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check thesection that explains what to do.Follow this manual’s advice. Waitingto do repairs can be costly and evendangerous.


Instrument ClusterThis feature is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It shows vehicle speed, how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States Base Cluster shown, Canada similar


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven,in either kilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs a newodometer installed, the new one isset to the mileage total of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown”.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last set to zero.

The button located above theodometer allows switching betweenthe odometer and the trip odometer.

To set the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the button.

Temperature DisplayThe outside air temperature isdisplayed on the center of theinstrument panel, within the tripodometer. The display shows theoutside air temperature in Fahrenheitwith a range from −40°F to 122°F(−40°C to 50°C).

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage shows abouthow much fuel is in the fuel tank.An arrow on the fuel gage indicates

United States Canada


that the fuel filler door is on the driverside of the vehicle. The fuel gageworks only when the ignition switch isturned to ON/RUN. When the gagefirst indicates E or empty, there is stillabout 2 gallons ( 7.6 L) of fuel left,but more needs to be added rightaway. When the vehicle is low on fuelthe low fuel warning light, locatedbelow the empty mark, comes on.

Five things that do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the fuel pumpshuts off before the gage readsF or full.

• It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took more or lessthan half the tank’s capacity tofill it.

• It takes the gage several minutesto read F or full after filling thevehicle with fuel.

• The gage moves a little when youturn, stop or speed up.

• The gage does not go back to Eor empty when you turn off theignition.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolanttemperature. If the gage pointermoves into the red area, the engineis too hot. Pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 9-23.

Safety Belt RemindersWhen the engine is started, a chimewill sound for several seconds toremind people to fasten their safetybelts, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light will also flashuntil the driver belt is buckled. If thedriver belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light comes on.

This light is located on the centerof the instrument panel, nextto the audio system.

When the key is turned to ON/RUNor START, this light comes onas a reminder for the right frontpassenger to fasten their safety belt.



This light flashes until the right frontpassenger safety belt is buckled.The passenger safety belt reminderlight will not come on if the right frontpassenger belt is already buckled orif a sensor does not detect the weightof a passenger in that seat.

If something is placed on the rightfront passenger seat, the sensorsin the seat may detect that objectand cause the right front passengersafety belt reminder light to come on.If this happens, remove the object.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 2-23.

The airbag readiness light comeson and stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Then thelight goes out.

If it stays on after the vehicle hasbeen started or comes on when whiledriving, the airbag system may notwork properly. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 2-29for important safety information.

The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started,the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF forseveral seconds as a system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF if there is weight on theseat, to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped). If the seat isunoccupied, the light will not bevisible after the system check.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags (if equipped) are enabled(may inflate).

If the word OFF is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). See PassengerSensing System on page 2-29 formore on this, including importantsafety information.

If, after several seconds, all statusindicator lights remain on, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while thislight is on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It makes sure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comeson and stays on, when the engineis running, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Heeding the light canprevent more serious damage tothe vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. This could also resultin a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine.If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by doingthe following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tank onpage 8-41. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.


• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off.See Fuel on page 8-38.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is in theON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II (on-boarddiagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control

systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready forinspection. This can happenif the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.


Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem is divided into two parts.If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop thevehicle. For good braking bothparts need to be working well.

If the warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

If the vehicle has anti-lock brakes,this light should come on when thekey is turned to START. If it does notcome on, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comeson when the parking brake isset. The light will stay on if theparking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parkingbrake is fully released, it meansthere is a brake problem.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the lightis still on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towedfor service.

See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light later in this sectionand Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light on page 4-17.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key is turnedto ON/RUN. This is normal. If thelight does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comeson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, there are stillbrakes, but no antilock brakes.




If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, there are no antilockbrakes and there is a problem withthe regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 4-17.

Service All-Wheel DriveLight

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out when the engine isstarted. It should go out when theengine is started. If it stays on, orcomes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the system.Have it checked by your dealer/retailer.

The four-wheel-drive indicator willlight up when the All-Wheel drive isactive.

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight

Vehicles with this feature, have awarning light that comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned toON/RUN as a check to show itis working.

If the warning light does not comeon, have it fixed so it will be able towarn if there is a problem.

If the warning light stays on, orcomes on while driving, the SpeedSensitive Power Steering may not beworking. See your dealer/retailer forservice.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light warns that there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or the VehicleStability Control (VSC) system.

The light comes on when the ignitionis turned to ON/RUN.

If the light comes on while driving,the system is not working.

The TCS light comes on when theVSC system warning light comes on,even if the TRAC OFF button is notpressed.

See StabiliTrak System onpage 8-35 for more information onVehicle Stability Control System.


See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 8-33 for more information.

Contact your dealer/retailer, ifthe light does not come on or if itstays on.

Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light

This warning light comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

It also comes on when the TractionControl System is turned off bypressing the TRAC OFF button.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 8-33 for more information.

If it stays on or comes on whiledriving, there is a problem with theTraction Control System (TCS),contact your dealer/retailer.

Tire Pressure Light

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started.

If there is a tire with low tirepressure, the light will stay onor come back on.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9-52 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil PressureLight

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damagethe engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in thismanual for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.


If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, on the fuel gage, comeson when the fuel tank is low onfuel. To turn if off, add fuel to thefuel tank.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle’s security system,see Vehicle Security on page 1-7.

High-Beam on Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 5-2 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 5-4 for moreinformation.

Lamps on Reminder

This light comes on whenever theheadlights are on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 5-1 for more information.



Taillamp Indicator Light

This light comes on when thetaillamps are on.

See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 5-1 for more information.

Low Washer FluidWarning Light

This light comes on when thewindshield washer fluid is low.See Washer Fluid on page 9-24for more information.

Cruise Control Light

The CRUISE light comes on whenthe cruise control is on.

See Cruise Control on page 8-36 formore information.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on if any door, therear liftgate, or the rear liftglassare not completely closed.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may have lightingand door lock features that can beprogrammed to your preference.You will need to schedule anappointment with your dealer/retailer if you would like to changethe way these features are currentlyprogrammed. The following is alist of the features that can beprogrammed. See your dealer/retailer to change the programmingof these features:

Driver Door Key Unlock Switch:If this feature is programmed on, allof the doors will unlock when the keyis turned twice in the driver’s doorlock cylinder. When the vehicleleft the factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

Canada Only

Canada Only


Courtesy Lamp Timer: Thisfeature allows for changing howlong the courtesy lamps stayon when all the doors and liftgateare closed and the key is out ofthe ignition, in LOCK/OFF, orin ACC/ACCESSORY. When thevehicle left the factory the courtesylamps were programmed to stayon for 15 seconds. This canbe changed to 7.5 secondsor 30 seconds.

Interior Lamps when Ignition off:If this feature is programmed on,the interior lamps will come on whenthe ignition is turned off when it isdark outside. When the vehicleleft the factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

Interior Lamps on with DoorKey Unlock: If this feature isprogrammed on, the interior lampswill come on when the doors areunlocked when it is dark outside.When the vehicle left the factorythis feature was programmed on.

Key Fob Signal: If this featureis programmed on, the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittercan be used to lock and unlockthe vehicle. When the vehicle leftthe factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

RFA Visual Feedback: If thisfeature is programmed on, thehazard lights will flash when youlock and unlock the vehicle with theRKE transmitter. When the vehicleleft the factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

RFA All Unlock Enable: If thisfeature is programmed on, pressingthe RKE unlock button twicewithin three second will unlockall of the doors. When the vehicleleft the factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

Remote Panic Command: If thisfeature is programmed on, pressingand holding the RKE panic buttonwill cause the horn to sound and thelights to flash. When the vehicleleft the factory this feature wasprogrammed on.

Automatic Door Locking: If thisfeature is programmed on, the doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) orwhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 8 mph (13 km/h).

Automatic Door Unlocking: If thisfeature is programmed on, the doorswill automatically unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park) orwhen the ignition is turned off.

All Door Unlock Command: If thisfeature is programmed on, the doorswill all unlock when the driver’s dooris opened.

Lock-out Timer: This featureallows for changing how long of adelay there is before all of the doorslock when pressing the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter. When thevehicle left the factory the delaywas set for 1 minute. This can bechanged to 30 seconds or 2 minutes.


OnStar System

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services besent to your location. If the keysare locked in the vehicle, call OnStarat 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a

signal sent to unlock the doors.OnStar Hands-Free Calling,including 30 trial minutes goodfor 60 days, is available on mostvehicles. Press the OnStar button tohave an OnStar advisor contactRoadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar.After the first prepaid year,contact OnStar to select a monthlyor annual subscription payment plan.If a payment plan is not selected,the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification and

emergency services, may bedeactivated and no longeravailable. For more informationvisit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or pressthe OnStar button to speak with anadvisor.

Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. To checkif this vehicle is able to provide theservices described below, or fora full description of OnStar servicesand system limitations, see theOnStar Owner’s Guide in the glovebox or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.


OnStar Services Availablewith the Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of

Airbag Deployment

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance

• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor(U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - AdvisorDelivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, andcan be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Most vehiclesinclude 30 trial minutes good for60 days. Hands-Free Calling canalso be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada,depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca,or speak with an OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling that usesminutes to access location-basedweather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. Press the phonebutton and give a few simple voicecommands to browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can recordand transmit vehicle information.This information is automaticallysent to an OnStar Call Center whenthe OnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed, or ifthe airbags deploy. This informationusually includes the vehicles GPSlocation and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding thecrash that the vehicle was involvedin (e.g. the direction from which thevehicle was hit).


When the Virtual Advisor feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling is used,the vehicle also sends OnStar thevehicles GPS location so they canprovide services where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacityand reception when the service isneeded, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service.Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remoteor enclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, including adequatebattery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStar buttonsis red, the system may not befunctioning properly. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Press the OnStar buttonto confirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


✍ NOTES


Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls ...........5-1Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer .............................5-2Flash-to-Pass ........................5-2Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) ......................5-2Automatic Headlamp

System ..............................5-3Hazard Warning Flashers .......5-3Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ...............................5-3Fog Lamps ...........................5-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel Illumination

Control ...............................5-4Dome Lamps ........................5-4Reading Lamps .....................5-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting .......................5-5Battery Power Protection ........5-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The lever on the left side of thesteering column operates theexterior lamps.

P / ; (Exterior Lamps): Turn theoutside band of the lever to operatethe lamps. For vehicles sold in theU.S., P appears on the instrument

panel cluster when the exteriorlamps are on. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, ; appears in theinstrument panel cluster. See Lampson Reminder on page 4-20.

The exterior lamp switch has threepositions:

( (Off): Turns off all lamps, exceptthe Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Lighting 5-1

Headlamps on ReminderA tone sounds when the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF, the driver dooris opened and the key is removedfrom the ignition while the lampsare on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for thisfeature to work.

Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you to turn the high beams on.

This instrument panel clusterlight 3 comes on while the highbeam headlamps are on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you want to pass.With the lever in the low-beamposition, pull the lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high-beams.If the headlamps are on when thelever is released, the high-beamswill return to low-beam.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional DRL are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes theheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on with the enginerunning.

• The exterior lamps switch is off.

• The parking brake is released.

When the exterior lamp switch isturned to the headlamp position, theDRL go off and the headlamps comeon. The other lamps that come onwith the headlamps also come on.

The headlamps automatically switchfrom DRL to the regular headlampsdepending on the darkness ofthe surroundings. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 5-3.

DRL also comes on if only theparking lamps are being used.

5-2 Lighting

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the low-beam headlampsat the normal brightness along withother lamps such as the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps andinstrument panel lights. An indicatorlight on the instrument panel comeson when the headlamps are on.See Instrument Cluster on page 4-9.

If the vehicle is driven through aparking garage, overcast weather,or a tunnel, the automatic headlampsystem may turn on. There is adelay before the lights turn on whenstarting the car at night.

Do not cover the automatic lightsensor, located on the top left cornerof the instrument panel. If the sensoris covered the headlamps will stay oncontinuously.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press | again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal alane change. Hold it there untilthe lane change is completed.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or alane change the arrow flashesrapidly or does not come on,a signal bulb may be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 9-38.

Lighting 5-3

Fog Lamps

# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles withfog lamps, move the band on the turnsignal/multifunction lever to # to turnthem on. The fog lamps only comeon when the headlamps are onlow beam.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

Use the trip odometer knob locatedon the right side of the instrumentpanel cluster to adjust the instrumentpanel brightness.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brightenor dim the instrument panel.

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lights decreases whenthe headlamps are on.

Dome LampsThe interior lamps control is locatedon the overhead lamp. To changethe interior lamps setting, slidethe switch to one of the followingpositions:

OFF: Turns the lamp off.

ON: Keeps the lamp on all the time.

Door: Turns the lamp on whenany door or the liftgate is opened.The lamp goes off when all the sidedoors and the liftgate are closed.

If the lamp switch is in the doorposition and a door is left open,the lamps will go off automaticallyafter 20 minutes.

5-4 Lighting

Reading LampsFor vehicles with a sunroof, there isa reading lamp near the sunroofswitch.

OFF: Turns the lamp off.

ON: Keeps the lamp on all the time.

Door: Turns the lamp on whenany door or the liftgate is opened.The lamp goes off when all the sidedoors and the liftgate are closed.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingAfter all the doors and liftgate areclosed, and the key is out of theignition, in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, the light remainson for about 15 seconds and thengoes out, except under the followingconditions:

• The ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN afterall the doors and liftgate areclosed.

• All the doors and the liftgate arelocked and the light is still on.

When any door is unlocked with thekey or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system transmitter, the light comeson for 15 seconds, even if the door isnot opened.

Battery Power ProtectionThe vehicle has a battery saverfeature designed to protectthe vehicle’s battery.

This feature will only work with thedome lamp in the Door position.

When any interior lamp is left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after20 minutes. This prevents draining ofthe battery.

Lighting 5-5

✍ NOTES

5-6 Lighting

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction ..........................6-1Operation .............................6-2

RadioAM-FM Radio .......................6-4Satellite Radio ......................6-6Radio Reception ...................6-8Fixed Mast Antenna ...............6-8Satellite Radio Antenna ..........6-9

Audio PlayersCD Player ............................6-9MP3 ..................................6-11Auxiliary Devices .................6-14

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem’s features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyesoff the road while driving, do thefollowing while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 8-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radioand telephone equipment.

The vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after theignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 8-18 for more information.

Infotainment System 6-1

Operation

Playing the Radio

PWR VOL (Power/Volume): Pressto turn the radio on and off. Turnthe PWR VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

CLOCK: Press to adjust the time.

Setting the ClockThe date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press theCLOCK button while the radio is on.

The date display times out and goesback to the normal radio and timedisplay. To adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

2. Press the PWR VOL (Power/Volume) knob to turn on the radio.

3. Press the CLOCK button, and theHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year)categories display.

4. Press the button under thecategory to be adjusted.

5. To increase the time or date,do one of the following: turnthe TUNE ADJ (Tune/Adjust)knob clockwise, press SEEK/TRACK y, press FWD (

(Forward), or continue to pressthe button under the category tobe adjusted.

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with CD (Base) similar

6-2 Infotainment System

6. To decrease the time ordate, do one of the following:turn the TUNE ADJ knobcounterclockwise, pressSEEK/TRACK z, or pressREV ) (Reverse).

7. To save the settings, pressthe CLOCK button, or letthe display time out.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour, and tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the CLOCK button andthen the button below the forwardarrow label on the display.The 12H and 24H, and thedate MMDD (month and day)and DDMM (day and month)categories will display.

2. Press the button below the12H or 24H label, and the dateMMDD (month and day) orDDMM (day and month) labelto choose how the radio displaysthe time and date.

3. To save the settings, pressthe CLOCK button, or letthe screen time out.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)To adjust the bass, midrange, andtreble:

1. Press the TUNE ADJ knob.

2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob, orpress the button below BASS,MID, or TREB so it is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE ADJ knobto select BASS, MID, or TREB.

4. Turn the TUNE ADJ knobto adjust the level.

5. Press the TUNE ADJ knob to setthe adjustment.

EQ (Equalization): To selectcustomized equalization settings:

1. Press the EQ button.

2. Press the button below thetab: POP, ROCK, COUNTRY,TALK, JAZZ, and CLASSICAL.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)To adjust the balance or fade,perform the following steps:

1. Press the TUNE ADJ knob.

2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knobor press the button belowBAL FADE so it is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE ADJ knob toselect the tone to adjust.

4. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob toadjust the audio balance to theright or the left speakers and thefade to adjust the audio volumeto the front or rear speakers.

5. Press the TUNE ADJ knob to setthe adjustment.


Setting Preset Stations

FAV (Favorites): Press to select upto six pages of favorites. Each pagecontains six favorite stations, andeach page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped) stations.

For vehicles without XM, onlyfour pages of favorites are available.

To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the button located belowthe FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe button located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theradio screen.

To store a radio station as afavorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where it can be stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix buttons until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat the steps to store anotherradio station.

Radio

AM-FM RadioRadio Data System (RDS)The audio system has Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features areavailable for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS:

• Stations can be selected basedon programming.

• Stations with trafficannouncements can be selected.

• Announcements concerning localand national emergencies can bereceived.

• Messages display from radiostations.


RDS relies on receiving specificinformation from radio stations andonly works when the information isavailable. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. Contactthe radio station if this happens.

When the radio is tuned to anRDS station, the station nameor call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can alsoprovide the time of day, a programtype (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

RDS Messages

ALERT: Displays when localor national emergencyannouncements are received.If the radio tunes to a related networkstation for the announcement,it returns to the original stationwhen the announcement ends.

The announcement should be heardeven if the volume is low or a CD isplaying. If a CD is playing, it will stopplaying during the announcement.

• The RDS alert feature is notsupported by all RDS radiostations.

• The RDS alert feature cannot beturned off.

• Alert is not affected by tests of theemergency broadcast system.

MSG (Message): Displays if thecurrent RDS station has a message.The message displays the artist,song title, call in phone numbers,etc. If the entire message doesnot display, parts of the messageappear every three seconds untilthe message is completed.MSG disappears from the displayonce the completed messagehas displayed.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to select AM, FM, orXM (if equipped).

TUNE ADJ (Tune/Adjust): Turn toselect radio stations.

y SEEK TRACK z: Press to goto the previous or next radio station.The radio only stops at stationswith a strong signal.

SCAN: Press to enter scan mode.The radio will display Scanning, thengoes to the next station, plays for afew seconds, then continues on tothe next station. Press SCAN againto stop scanning. The radio onlystops at stations with a strong signal.

INFO (Information) (FM-RDS,XM™ Satellite Radio Service, andMP3 Features): Press to displayinformation for the current FM-RDS,XM station, or MP3 song. Choosefrom Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category).

NO INFO displays when informationis not available from the station.


Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receiveXM programming.

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. During your trial or whenyou subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for whenyou are not in your vehicle. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.comor call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to select AM, FM,or XM.

TUNE ADJ (Tune/Adjust): Turn toselect radio stations.

y SEEK TRACK z: Press to goto the previous or next radio station.The radio only stops at stationswith a strong signal.

SCAN: Press to enter scan mode.The radio will display Scanning, thengoes to the next station, plays for afew seconds, then continues on tothe next station. Press SCAN againto stop scanning. The radio onlystops at stations with a strong signal.

INFO (Information) (FM-RDS,XM™ Satellite Radio Service, andMP3 Features): Press to displayinformation for the current FM-RDS,XM station, or MP3 song. Choosefrom Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category).

NO INFO displays when informationis not available from the station.

Finding a Category (CAT)StationXM stations are organized incategories.

To select and find a desiredcategory:

1. Press the CAT button.

2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob toselect a category.

3. Press y or z to go to thecategory’s first station, when thedesired category is displayed.

4. Press y or z to go to anotherstation within the selectedcategory.

5. Press CAT to exit the categoryselect mode or wait for CAT totime out.

If CAT times out and is no longer onthe display, return to Step 1.

NOT FOUND displays if the desiredcategory cannot be found.


Scanning Categories (CAT)To scan a desired category:

1. Press the CAT button to enterthe category select mode.

2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob toselect a category.

3. Press y or z for two secondsto scan the stations in theselected category.

4. Press y or z again to stopscanning.

NOT FOUND displays if the desiredcategory cannot be found.

XM Radio Messages

xL (Explicit Language Channels):These channels, or any others,can be blocked by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating: The encryption code inthe receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but thevehicle is in a location that is blockingthe XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

CH Off Air: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune into another channel.

CH Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

CH Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Info: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

Not Found: There are no channelsavailable for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked: The XM receiver inthe vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having thevehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message will alternate with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activatethe service. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Chk XMRcvr: If this message doesnot clear within a short period oftime, the receiver may have a fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.


Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

FMFM signals only reach about 10 to40 miles (16 to 65 km). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference can cause anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turnit off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base.If the mast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.


Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM™ SatelliteRadio Service, the antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD PlayerPlaying a CDThe CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with anadapter ring.

1. Insert a CD label side uppartway into the slot.

2. The CD player pulls the CD inand begins playing.

3. The CD symbol and tracknumber displays.

The CD stays in the player if theignition or radio is turned off.

If the CD was the last sourceselected, it resumes playing whenthe radio is turned on.

Y (EJECT): Press and release toeject a CD. Once ejected it can beremoved. If the CD is not removedafter several seconds the CD playerautomatically pulls the disc back intothe player and starts playing.

TUNE ADJ: Turn the TUNE ADJknob to select tracks on the CD.

y SEEK TRACK z: Press y togo to the start of the current track, ifmore than ten seconds have played.Press z to go to the next track.Holding or pressing y or z multipletimes causes the player to continuemoving backward or forward throughthe tracks on the CD.


( FWD REV ) (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press and hold (to advance playback quickly within atrack. Release to resume playing thetrack. Press and hold ) to reverseplayback quickly within a track.Release to resume playing the track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when listening to theradio.

Press the CD/AUX button again andthe system begins playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”later in this section.

INFO (Information): Press toswitch the display between the tracknumber, elapsed time of the track,and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

EQ (Equalization): Press to selectan equalization setting while playinga CD. See “EQ” listed previously formore information. If an EQ setting isselected for a CD, it is activated eachtime a CD is played.

Care of CDs

The sound quality of the CD playercan be reduced because of:

• The CD-R quality.

• The method of recordingthe CD-R.

• The quality of the music that hasbeen recorded on the CD-R.

• The way the CD-R has beenhandled.

Store CD-R(s) in their original casesor other protective cases and awayfrom dust and direct sunlight. TheCD player scans the bottom surfaceof the disc. If the surface of a CDis damaged, such as cracked,broken, or scratched, the CD maynot play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by grasping theouter edges or the edge of the holeand the outer edge.

To clean a CD, use a soft lint freecloth, or dampen a clean softcloth in a mild neutral detergentsolution mixed with water. Wipe theCD from the center to the edge.


Care of The CD Player

Use a marking pen to identify CDs,do not add labels.

Do not use CD lens cleaners; theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscRadios with the MP3 featureare capable of playing an MP3CD-R disc. See MP3 on page 6-11for more information.

CD MessagesIf the CD ejects, it could be for oneof the following reasons:• The CD player is very hot. When

the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

• The format of the CD might notbe compatible. See ‘‘Using anMP3’’ later in this section.

• A problem may have occurredwhile burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in theCD player.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

MP3MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 Format

The MP3 player will only play CD-Rdiscs. It can read and play amaximum of:• 50 folders• 11 folders in depth• 50 playlists• 10 sessions• 255 files

All folders, playlists, sessions andfiles over the maximum are ignored.Record an MP3 disc:• Onto a CD-R disc.• Record playlists with

an .m3u or .wpl extension.• Do not mix standard audio and

MP3 files on the same disc.• Record the entire disc at once.• Finalize the disc when recording

an MP3 disc with multiplesessions.


Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All .mp3 files in the rootdirectory are accessed beforefolders in the root directory.

Empty Directory or Folder

Empty folders and directories do notdisplay. The system ignores emptydirectories and folders and advancesto the next directory or folder thathas .mp3 files in it.

No Folder

On a CD that contains only .mp3files in the root directory the nextand previous folder functions donot work.

On a CD that contains playlistsand .mp3 files the next and previousfolder functions search playlistsfirst and then search .mp3 filesin the root folder.

Order of Play

CDs that have playlists play thetracks in the following order:

1. After the first track in the firstplaylist ends, play continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist

2. After the last track of the lastplaylist ends, play restarts fromthe first track of the first playlist.

CDs that do not have playlists playthe tracks in the following order:

1. The first file in the root directoryplays.

2. After all files from the rootdirectory have played, filesin the folders play.

3. After playing the last file from thelast folder, play restarts with thefirst file in the root directory.

File System and Naming

The radio display shows, tracknames that are shorter than39 characters. Names that arelonger are shortened. The trackname appears as:

• The song name that is in theID3 tag.

• The file name without the fileextension if the song name isnot in the ID3 tag.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Playlists are accessed before filesor folders in the root directory.

Preprogrammed playlists createdby WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, orReal Jukebox™ software can beaccessed and are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audiosong files.


Music Navigator

The music navigator feature letsMP3 CDs play in order by artist oralbum.

• The MP3 player scans the discto sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information.

• It can take several minutes toscan the disc depending onthe number of MP3 files recordedto the CD-R.

• The radio starts playing while thedisc is being scanned.

• After the scan is finished, thedisc starts playing.

Playing an MP3The MP3 player can play thesmaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDswith an adapter ring.

1. Insert a CD label side uppartway into the slot.

2. The CD player pulls the CD inand begins playing.

3. The CD stays in the player if theignition or radio is turned off.

4. If the CD was the last sourceselected, it resumes playingwhen the radio is turned on.

Y (EJECT): Press and release toeject a CD. Once the disc is ejectedit can be removed. If the CD is notremoved after several seconds theCD player automatically pulls thedisc back into the player and startsplaying.

y SEEK TRACK z: Press togo to the start of the current track,if more than ten seconds haveplayed. Press z to go to the nexttrack. Holding or pressing y or zmultiple times will cause the playerto continue moving backward orforward through the tracks onthe CD.

( FWD REV ) (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press and hold (to advance playback quickly within atrack. Release ( to resume playingthe track. Press and hold ) toreverse playback quickly within atrack. Release ( to resume playingthe track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing.

INFO (Information): Press whenan MP3 CD is loaded, then pressthe button below the Song, Artist,Album, or Folder label to view theinformation.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when listening to the radio.

Press the CD/AUX button again andthe system begins playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.


RDM (Random): Press the buttonbelow the RDM label to hearthe tracks in random order.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe button below to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Pressthe button below to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

h (Music Navigator): Press thebutton below to play MP3 files inorder by artist or album.

SORT: Press the button below theSORT label to change betweenplayback by artist or album whileusing the Music Navigator.

BACK: Press the button below theBACK label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

ST (Previous/Next): Pressthe button below to go to thenext or previous artist or albumin alphabetical order while usingthe Music Navigator.

Auxiliary DevicesThe radio has an auxiliary inputjack located on the lower right sideof the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack.An external audio device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use asanother audio source.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cableto the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX buttonto begin playing audio fromthe device over the vehiclespeakers.

PWR VOL (Power/Volume): Turnto adjust the volume. Additionalvolume adjustments may have to bemade from the portable device ifthe volume is too quiet or not loud.

BAND: Press to listen to theradio when a portable audio deviceis playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player.


Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems ........7-1

Air VentsAir Vents .............................7-4

MaintenancePassenger Compartment

Air Filter .............................7-4

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Air Delivery Mode ControlB. Fan ControlC. Temperature Control

D. RecirculationE. Rear Window DefoggerF. Air Conditioning

Climate Controls 7-1

Fan Control

9 (Fan): Turn the center knobtoward 4 to turn the system on orincrease fan speed.

If the airflow seems low when thefan is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. Formore information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 7-4and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10-3.

Temperature Control

Turn the right knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control

Turn the left knob to select from thefollowing modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theupper instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theupper instrument panel outletsand the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor and side window outlets.

- (Defog): Air is directed betweenthe windshield, side windows,instrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

Use the defog mode to clear theinside of the windshield of fogor moisture and to warm thepassengers. The air conditioningcompressor runs automatically in thissetting without pressing A/C, unlessthe outside temperature is at orbelow 32°F (0°C).

1 (Defrost): Air is directed to thewindshield, instrument paneloutlets and the side windows.

Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the outside of thewindshield more quickly. The airconditioning compressor runsautomatically in this setting withoutpressing A/C, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below32°F (0°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

7-2 Climate Controls

Air ConditioningFor vehicles with this feature, therewill be the following controls:

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light showsthat it is on.

MAX A/C (Maximum AirConditioning): Press the A/C andrecirculation buttons at the sametime to select MAX A/C.

On hot days, open the windows to lethot inside air escape; then closethem. The vehicle will cool quickerand the A/C system operates moreefficiently.

Because the A/C system removesmoisture from the air, it is normalfor a small amount of water todrip under the vehicle while idlingor just after turning the engine off.

Recirculation

? (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light shows that it is on.This mode recirculates the air insidethe vehicle and helps to heat or coolthe air more quickly. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

Press the button again to turn therecirculation mode off and theoutside air mode on. Recirculation isautomatically turned off when theclimate control system mode knobis turned to defog, defrost, or ispositioned between modes.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to clear fog from therear window. It will only work whenthe ignition is in the ON/RUNposition.

= (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.An indicator light shows that it is on.The rear window defogger stays onfor 15 minutes. Clear any snow fromthe rear window.

Notice: Do not use a razorblade or sharp object to clear theinside rear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actionsmay damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty.


Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and outboard sides of theinstrument panel, to change thedirection of the air flowing throughthe vents.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the outside airinlets at the base of thewindshield.

• Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

• Keep the area under thefront seats clear of objects formore effective air circulation.

• If the airflow seems low whenthe fan is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment airfilter might need to be replaced.For more information, seePassenger CompartmentAir Filter on page 7-4.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterBoth outside and recirculated airare routed through a passengercompartment air filter. Pollen, dustparticles and other contaminantsare removed by the filter. Airflowreductions indicate that the filterneeds to be replaced. For areplacement filter see your dealer/retailer. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 10-3 for replacementintervals.

The access panel for the air filter isbehind the glove box. To replacethe filter:

1. Open the glove box door. Pusheach side of the glovebox inand pull out to remove.


2. Push the side fastener to releaseand remove the filter cover.

3. Remove the air filter.

4. Install a new air filter andreassemble the unit by reversingthe steps.

Replacing the air filter isrecommended, but will not damagethe vehicle if it is not.


✍ NOTES


Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better Fuel

Economy ............................8-2Defensive Driving ..................8-2Drunk Driving .......................8-3Control of a Vehicle ...............8-3Braking ................................8-4Steering ...............................8-4Off-Road Recovery ................8-6Loss of Control .....................8-6Driving on Wet Roads ............8-7Highway Hypnosis .................8-8Hill and Mountain Roads ........8-8Winter Driving .......................8-9If the Vehicle is Stuck ..........8-11Vehicle Load Limits ..............8-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In ...........8-16Ignition Positions .................8-16Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) .....................8-18

Starting the Engine ..............8-18Engine Heater .....................8-19Shifting Into Park .................8-20Shifting Out of Park .............8-22Parking ..............................8-22Parking Over Things

That Burn .........................8-23

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust ...................8-23Running the Vehicle While

Parked .............................8-24

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission

(Four Speed Automatic) ......8-24Automatic Transmission

(Five Speed Automatic) .......8-27Manual Mode ......................8-28

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission ...........8-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ...................8-31

BrakesAntilock Brake

System (ABS) ...................8-32Parking Brake .....................8-33

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control

System (TCS) ...................8-33StabiliTrak System ...............8-35

Cruise ControlCruise Control .....................8-36

FuelFuel ...................................8-38Recommended Fuel .............8-39Gasoline Specifications .........8-39California Fuel

Requirements ....................8-39Fuels in Foreign Countries ....8-40Fuel Additives .....................8-40Filling the Tank ...................8-41Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..........................8-43

TowingGeneral Towing Information ...8-43Driving Characteristics and

Towing Tips ......................8-44Trailer Towing .....................8-48Towing Equipment ...............8-49

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical

Equipment ........................8-50

Driving and Operating 8-1

Driving Information

Driving for BetterFuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 2-8.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

8-2 Driving and Operating

Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 9-3.


BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 4-17.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. Butthat is only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels20 m (66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between thevehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavyacceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keepingpace with traffic. This is a mistake.The brakes might not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster with a lot ofheavy braking. Keeping pace withthe traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump the brakes.If the brakes are pumped, the pedalcould get harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will still be somepower brake assist but it will be usedwhen the brake is applied. Once thepower assist is used up, it can takelonger to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.

SteeringIf the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist system willcontinue to operate until you are ableto stop the vehicle. If power steeringassist is lost because the electricpower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.


If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice areduced amount of power steeringassist. The normal amount of powersteering assist should return shortlyafter a few normal steeringmovements.

The electric power steeringsystem does not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, such asabnormally high steering effort for aprolonged period of time, contactyour dealer/retailer for servicerepairs.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which the curveis banked, and vehicle speed. Whilein a curve, speed is the one factorthat can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steeringcan be more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking — if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. Firstapply the brakes. See Braking onpage 8-4. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.


An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, ifthere is nothing in the way, steer sothat the vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 8 to 13 cm, 3 to 5 inches,(about one-eighth turn) until the right

front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.


The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. And inthe acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, the vehicle maystraighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You might notrealize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect your abilityto stop and accelerate. Always driveslower in these types of drivingconditions and avoid driving throughlarge puddles and deep-standing orflowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brake pedaluntil the brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.


HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 9-43.

• Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when goingdownhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow orice between the tires and the road,creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 0°C (32°F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall, resultingin even less traction. Avoid driving onwet ice or in freezing rain until roadscan be treated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) onpage 8-32 improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops on a slipperyroads, but apply the brakes soonerthan when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches can occuron otherwise clear roads in shadedareas. The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12-6.To get help and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:

• Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from

around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

• Open a window about 5 cm(two inches) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8-23.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This can causedeadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know itis in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods onlyas needed to keep warm, but becareful.


To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warm thevehicle and then shut the engine offand close the window most of theway to save heat. Repeat this untilhelp arrives but only when you feelreally uncomfortable from the cold.Moving about to keep warm alsohelps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help withthe headlamps. Do this as little aspossible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin athigh speed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid going above55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 9-61.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a forward gear,or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the accelerator pedalwhile shifting, and press lightly onthe accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 9-73.


Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and theCertification label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle’s centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver’sdoor open you will find the labelattached below the door lock post(striker). The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B)in kilograms and pounds.

This weight includes the weightof all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the tire size ofthe original equipment tires (C),and the recommended cold tireinflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 9-43 and TirePressure on page 9-49.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Label Example


Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer,see Trailer Towing on page 8-48for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 1



B. Subtract Occupant Weight68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle’s maximum vehiclecapacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel is attached to the centerpillar, near the driver’s door latch.It tells you the gross weightcapacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

Example 2 Example 3

Label Example


Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load,you should spread it out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading yourvehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do notoverload your vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the rear areaof your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.If you have fold-down rearseats, you will find four

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

anchors on the back wallof your trunk. You can usethese anchors to tie downlighter loads. They are notstrong enough for heavythings, however, so putthem as far forward asyou can in the trunk orrear area.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in yourvehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 200 miles (322 km) or so.During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing onpage 8-48 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicle andmore information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and applythe brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key,make sure it is all the way in, andturn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer/retailer.


LOCK/OFF: This is the only positionfrom which you can remove the key.This locks the steering wheel,ignition and automatic transmission.Push in the ignition switch as youturn the key toward you.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto the LOCK/OFF position.

A warning tone will sound if the driverdoor is opened with the key in theignition.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with your wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key toACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’twork, then the vehicle needs service.

{ CAUTION

On manual transmission vehicles,turning the key to LOCK/OFF andremoving it will lock the steeringcolumn and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle.This could cause a collision.If you need to turn the engineoff while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

ACC/ACCESSORY: This positionprovides power to some of theelectrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition. To movethe key from ACC/ACCESSORY toLOCK/OFF, push in the key and thenturn it to LOCK/OFF.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened when theignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF and the key is in theignition.

ON/RUN: The ignition switch staysin this position when the engine isrunning. This position can be usedto operate the electrical accessories,including the ventilation fan and115 volt power outlet, as well as todisplay some warning and indicatorlights. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drainedif you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. You may not beable to start the vehicle if the batteryis allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

START: This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.


Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for less than a minute afterthe engine is turned off.

• Power Windows, if equipped

• Sunroof, if equipped

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for less than aminute or until either front door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Starting the EngineAutomatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will notstart in any other position. To restartwhen you are already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

Notice: Shifting into P (Park)with the vehicle moving coulddamage the transmission. Shiftinto P (Park) only when the vehicleis stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be inNEUTRAL and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedalto the floor and start the engine.The vehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm.Vehicles equipped withthe 1.8L engine have aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora about 30 seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after25 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning theignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.Vehicles equipped withthe 2.4L engine should notbe cranked for more than30 seconds at a time. Thismay overheat the starter andwiring systems.


Notice: Holding the key in STARTfor longer than 15 seconds at atime will cause the battery to bedrained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage thestarter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining the battery ordamaging the starter.

2. If the engine does not start, waitabout 15 seconds and try againto start the engine by turningthe ignition to START. Wait about15 seconds between each try.When the engine has run about10 seconds to warm up, thevehicle is ready to be driven.Do not run the engine at highspeed when it is cold.If the weather is below freezing(32°F or 0°C), let the engine runfor a few minutes to warm up.

3. If the engine still will not start, orstarts but then stops, it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the accelerator pedalall the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing,but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If electrical parts oraccessories are added, youcould change the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not,the engine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater, ifavailable, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting the vehicle.


To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The electricalcord is located on the driver sideof the engine compartment.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8-44.


To shift into P (Park), do thefollowing:

1. Hold the brake pedal downand set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 8-33for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicleand to the left.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the key in your hand, thevehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave an automatictransmission vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure the vehicle is inP (Park) and the parking brakeis firmly set before you leave it.

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift into P (Park) properly, theweight of the vehicle may put toomuch force on the parking pawl inthe transmission. You may find itdifficult to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park on page 8-20.

Move the shift lever out of P (Park)before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl inthe transmission, so you can pull theshift lever out of P (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park).

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 8-22 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever.

2. Hold the brake pedal down.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

ParkingBefore you get out of the vehicle,move the shift lever into R (Reverse),and firmly apply the parking brake.Once the shift lever has been placedinto R (Reverse) with the clutchpedal pressed in, you can turn theignition key to LOCK/OFF, removethe key and release the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or ifthe vehicle is pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 8-44.


Evaporation PumpThe vehicle is equipped witha vacuum pump for the fuelevaporation system. This pumpperforms a fuel evaporation leakagetest approximately five hoursafter the engine is turned off.You may hear a sound comingfrom underneath the rear cargocompartment for several minutes.

The noise is normal and does notsignify a malfunction. See yourdealer/retailer with any questions.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.


Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 8-23.

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 8-20.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8-44.

AutomaticTransmission

Automatic Transmission(Four Speed Automatic)

The shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.


{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 8-20. If you arepulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 8-44.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake first and move the shiftlever to the right before you can shiftfrom P (Park) when the ignition key isin ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then move theshift lever to the right and move theshift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park on page 8-22.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 8-11.


N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the vehicle when itis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph(56 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehicle

that way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You can drivein L2 (Low) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (56 km/h) andD (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed more than D (Drive)without using the brakes. You canuse 2 (Second) on hills. It can helpcontrol vehicle speed as you godown steep mountain roads, but thenyou would also want to use thebrakes off and on.

L (Low): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than2 (Second) without using the brakes.You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in L (Low), the transmission willnot shift into low gear until the vehicleis going slow enough.


Automatic Transmission(Five Speed Automatic)

The shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 8-20. If you arepulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 8-44.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control

system. You must fully apply theregular brake first and move the shiftlever to the right before shifting fromP (Park) while the ignition key is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then move theshift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park on page 8-22.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 8-11.


N (Neutral): In this position,the engine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy from the vehicle. If youneed more power for passing, andyou are:

• Going less than 35 mph(55 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) ormore, push the accelerator all theway down.

Manual ModeDriver Shift Control (DSC)DSC mode allows you to choosethe top gear limit of the vehicle’stransmission and the vehicle’s speedwhile driving down hill or towing atrailer. To use this feature, do thefollowing:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) left to S (Shift Control).While driving in this mode, thetransmission will remain in thedriver selected range. Whencoming to a stop, the vehiclewill automatically shift into1 (First) gear.

2. Move the shift lever forward toincrease the gear range, orrearward to decrease the gearrange available based upon yourcurrent driving conditions andneeds.


The number displayed in theinstrument cluster is the highestgear that the transmission willbe allowed to operate in. However,your vehicle can automaticallyshift to lower gears as requiredby various driving conditions.This means that all gears belowthat number are available.

The display in the instrument clusterwill change from the currentlydisplayed message to 4 (Fourth)when you enter S (Shift Control), andchange to indicate the requestedgear range when moving the shiftlever forward or rearward.

While using the DSC feature thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. You canuse this for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allowshifting into gears appropriatefor the vehicles speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM):

• The transmission will notautomatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the vehicle speedor engine RPM is too high.

• The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine RPMis too high. An audible warningwill sound and the downshift willnot be allowed. The downshiftrequest will have to be madeagain once the vehicle reachesan acceptable speed.

DownshiftRequested

RequiredVehicle Speed

4 (Fourth) to3 (Third)

Below 95 mph(153 km/h)

3 (Third) to2 (Second)


2 (Second) to1 (First)


Manual Transmission

1 (First): Press the clutch pedal andshift into 1 (First). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) whenyou are going less than 20 mph(32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inNeutral and let up on the clutch.Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into 1 (First).


2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth): Shiftinto 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth)the same way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown on the clutch pedal and shiftinto R (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use R (Reverse) along withthe parking brake for parkingthe vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ CAUTION

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

This chart shows the maximumallowable speeds in each gear whenmaximum acceleration is necessary.


Manual TransmissionRecommended Shift Speeds

Engine 1.8L

1 to 2 34 mph(55 km/h)

2 to 3 56 mph(91 km/h)

3 to 4 82 mph(132 km/h)

4 to 5 121 mph(195 km/h)

Engine 2.4L

1 to 2 31 mph(50 km/h)

2 to 3 53 mph(86 km/h)

3 to 4 82 mph(132 km/h)

4 to 5 112 mph(181 km/h)

If vehicle speed drops below 20 mph(32 km/h), or if the engine is notrunning smoothly, you shoulddownshift to the next lower gear.You may have to downshift two ormore gears to keep the enginerunning smoothly or for goodperformance.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveWith this feature, engine power issent to all four wheels at all times.This is like four-wheel drive, but thereis no separate lever or switch toengage or disengage the rear axle.It is fully automatic, and adjusts itselfas needed for road conditions.


Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system thathelps prevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 4-17.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes and continuebraking. Here is what happenswith ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to applythe brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop,even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work. The antilock pumpor motor might be heard operating,and the brake pedal might befelt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.United States Canada


Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you can

press the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thelever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause premature wearor damage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 8-44.

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both ofthe drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system works the frontbrakes and reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the systemworking, but this is normal. Leave thesystem on during ordinary driving sothat it can operate when needed.


When the ignition is turned toON/RUN, the system automaticallyturns on. If the system has beenturned off, it will automatically turn onat 55 km/h (35 mph). TCS cannot beturned off above 55 km/h (35 mph).

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started.

The traction control system warninglight flashes and an alarm will soundintermittently when the system islimiting wheel spin.

g is located to the left of the steeringwheel below the instrument panelcluster.

When getting the vehicle out of mudor newly fallen snow, turn off thetraction control system. The systemthat controls engine performanceinterferes with the process of freeingthe front wheels. To turn off tractioncontrol, press and release g. Thetraction control system warning lightwill come on. To turn the tractioncontrol system back on, press gagain or increase vehicle speed andthe system will automatically turnback on. The traction control systemwarning light will go off. See TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 4-19 for more information.

To turn off both the traction controlsystem and StabiliTrak, press andhold g while the vehicle is stopped.The traction control system warninglight and the VSC OFF light will comeon. To turn the systems back on,press g again. If both systems areturned off, they will not turn back onautomatically when vehicle speedincreases.

If the VSC OFF light flashes, thereis a problem in the traction controlsystem or StabiliTrak.

Adding non-GM accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 9-3 for more information.


StabiliTrak SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems. This system automaticallycontrols the brakes and engine tohelp prevent the vehicle fromskidding when cornering on aslippery road surface or turningthe steering wheel abruptly.

This system activates when thevehicle speed reaches or exceeds15 km/h (9 mph), and deactivateswhen the vehicle speed reduces tobelow 15 km/h (9 mph).

A sound may be heard in the enginecompartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or justafter the vehicle begins to move.This means that the system is inthe self-check mode, but does notindicate a problem.

If the vehicle is going to skid duringdriving, the traction control systemwarning light flashes and an alarmsounds intermittently. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

To turn off both the traction controlsystem and StabiliTrak, press andhold g while the vehicle is stopped.

The traction control system warninglight and the VSC OFF light will comeon. To turn the systems back on,press g again. If both systems areturned off, they will not turn back onautomatically when vehicle speedincreases.

If the VSC OFF light flashes, thereis a problem in the traction controlsystem or StabiliTrak.


Cruise Control

For vehicles with cruise control, thelever is located on the right sideof the steering wheel.

Cruise control, lets a speed of25 mph (40 km/h) or more bemaintained without keeping your footon the accelerator. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below25 mph (40 km/h).

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

1. Press the ON-OFF button at theend of the lever. The CRUISElight on the instrument panelcluster comes on. See CruiseControl Light on page 4-21.

2. Get to the desired speed.

3. Move the lever down to −SETand release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.


If the cruise control indicator lightflashes, press the ON-OFF buttononce to deactivate the system,and then press the button back on.If the cruise control speed cannotbe set or the cruise control cancelsimmediately after being activated,there may be a problem with thecruise control system. See yourdealer/retailer.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the brakes are applied after thecruise control is set, the cruisecontrol is turned off.

If the vehicle speed is 25 mph(40 km/h) or greater, push the leverup to +RES (Resume/Accelerate) toreturn to the previously set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are three ways to increasethe vehicle speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to getto the higher speed. Move thelever down to −SET. Release thelever and the accelerator pedal.

• Move the cruise lever up to +RES.Hold it there until the desiredspeed is reached, and thenrelease the lever.

• To increase the vehicle speed invery small amounts, move thelever to +RES briefly and thenrelease it. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to reduce thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Push and hold the lever to −SETuntil the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, push the lever downbriefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the cruisecontrol speed set earlier.


Using Cruise Control on Hills

The cruise control performance willvary depending upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills.

When going up steep hills, you mighthave to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed.

When going downhill, you mighthave to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep the vehicle speed down.Applying the brake or downshiftingto 2 SECOND or L LOW turnsoff the cruise control.

Ending Cruise Control

There are several ways to turn offthe cruise control:

• Step on the brake pedal or pushthe clutch pedal, if the vehiclehas a manual transmission.

• Press the ON-OFF button.

• Pull the cruise control levertoward you.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed memoryis erased when the cruise control orthe ignition is turned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 8-40 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehiclemight fail a smog-check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4-14. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United Statesor Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are now requiredto contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly.In most cases, you should not haveto add anything to the fuel. However,some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive requiredto meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors andintake valves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intake valves.GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer/retailer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.


Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emissioncontrol system could be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel door release lever is nearthe floor under the driver seat on theoutboard side.


The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. On some vehiclesyou may have to push in whileturning the cap.

While refueling, hang the fuel capinside of the fuel door.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks, otherwisethe Malfunction Indicator Lamp mayturn on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 4-14.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you ifyou open the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hissnoise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Careon page 9-75.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has

been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 4-14.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/retailer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This maycause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 4-14.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than theground.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for your vehicle.Contact your dealer/retailer or towingretailer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:• For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips.

• For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see Trailer Towing.

• For information on equipment totow a trailer, see TowingEquipment.

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicleon page 9-73. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle — such as a motorhome, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 9-73.


Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ CAUTION

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell — or even at all. The driverand passengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a trailer onlyif all the steps in this section havebeen followed. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of the vehicle, see

Trailer Towing on page 8-48.Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read thissection carefully before pulling atrailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, wheelassemblies and tires are forced towork harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engineis required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat.Also, the trailer adds considerablyto wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements.

Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws,including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering. Makesure the rig will be legal, not onlywhere you live but also where youwill be driving. A good source forthis information can be state orprovincial police.

• Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer is towed,do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.


• Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions. For vehicles witha manual transmission, it is betternot to use the highest gear.

• Use the Sport Shift mode and thecruise control when towing.

• Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer. Do not drivefaster than the maximum postedspeed for trailers, or no more than90 km/h (55 mph), to save wearon the vehicle’s parts.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for the openroad. Get acquainted with the feel ofhandling and braking with the addedweight of the trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Towing with StabiliTrakWhen towing, the sound of theStabiliTrak modulator mightbe heard. StabiliTrak is reacting tothe vehicle movement causedby the trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situations thatrequire heavy braking and suddenturns.

PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.


Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally to besure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If the transmissionis not shifted down, the brakesmight have to be used so much thatthey would get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lower gearif the transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions. For vehicles with amanual transmission, it is betternot to use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil at alower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. For vehicles with manualtransmissions, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission out ofgear and the parking brake applied,for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 9-23.


Parking on Hills

{ CAUTION

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet for vehicleswith an automatic transmission,or into gear for vehicles with amanual transmission. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal.Then apply the parking brake andshift into P (Park) for vehicleswith an automatic transmissionor into gear for vehicles witha manual transmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking ona Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

• start the engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual’s Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmissionfluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts,cooling system and brake system.It is a good idea to inspect thesebefore and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 9-23.


Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer.

• The weight of the trailer tongue.

• The total weight on yourvehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than680 kg (1,500 lbs). But eventhat can be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipment

on the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in the towvehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from themaximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice, oryou can write us at our CustomerAssistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 12-3for more information.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle. Ifthere are a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in the vehicle, itwill reduce the tongue weight thevehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. If towing a trailer, thetongue load must be added to theGVW because the vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12 for moreinformation about the vehicle’smaximum load capacity.


The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’sTiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire-Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing EquipmentHitchesIt is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

• The rear bumper on the vehicle isnot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

• Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal the holeslater when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, dirt,water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustcan get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 8-23.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue of thetrailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.


Trailer BrakesDoes the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailerbrakes so they are installed,adjusted and maintained properly.

Because the vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle’sbrake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring HarnessAll of the electrical circuits requiredfor the trailer lighting system can beaccessed at the driver’s side rearlamp connector. This connector islocated under the carpet at the rearcorner of the cargo compartment.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 2-34.


Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information ...............9-2California Proposition

65 Warning .........................9-2California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements ........9-3Accessories and

Modifications .......................9-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own

Service Work ......................9-4Hood ...................................9-5Engine Compartment

Overview ............................9-6Engine Oil ............................9-9Automatic Transmission

Fluid ................................9-12Manual Transmission Fluid ....9-14Hydraulic Clutch ..................9-15Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .......9-16Cooling System ...................9-19Engine Coolant ...................9-19

Engine Overheating .............9-23Power Steering Fluid ............9-24Washer Fluid ......................9-24Brakes ...............................9-26Brake Fluid .........................9-27Battery ...............................9-28All-Wheel Drive ...................9-29Starter Switch Check ............9-30Wiper Blade Replacement .....9-30

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ................9-32

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement ...............9-33Halogen Bulbs ....................9-33Headlamps and Parking

Lamps ..............................9-33Taillamps ............................9-35License Plate Lamp .............9-36Replacement Bulbs ..............9-37

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload ....9-37Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...9-38Engine Compartment Fuse

Block ...............................9-38Instrument Panel Fuse

Block ...............................9-41

Wheels and TiresTires ..................................9-43Tire Sidewall Labeling ..........9-44Tire Designations .................9-46Tire Terminology and

Definitions .........................9-46Tire Pressure ......................9-49Tire Pressure Monitor

System .............................9-50Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation ..........................9-52Tire Inspection ....................9-54Tire Rotation .......................9-55When It Is Time for New

Tires ................................9-56Buying New Tires ................9-56Different Size Tires and

Wheels .............................9-58Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ............................9-58Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance ............................9-60Wheel Replacement .............9-60Tire Chains .........................9-61If a Tire Goes Flat ...............9-62Tire Changing .....................9-63Compact Spare Tire .............9-68

Vehicle Care 9-1

Jump StartingJump Starting .....................9-69

TowingTowing the Vehicle ..............9-73Recreational Vehicle

Towing .............................9-73

Appearance CareExterior Care ......................9-75Interior Care .......................9-80Floor Mats ..........................9-83

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defectsor other reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

9-2 Vehicle Care

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to the vehicle,they can affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such thingsas airbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessoriescould even cause malfunction ordamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, arenot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designedto complement and function withother systems on the vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer canaccessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories.

Vehicle Care 9-3

When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 2-35.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 12-12.

9-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see AirbagSystem Check on page 2-36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 10-18.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle, locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. From the front of the vehicle,pull up on the secondaryhood release located nearthe middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop rod fromits retainer and insert into the slot,moving it straight up. If it is movedto the side or toward the insideof the vehicle, it may becomedetached.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Return the hood prop rod carefullyback to its retainer to avoiddamaging the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 9-5

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 1.8L L4 engine, this is what you see.

9-6 Vehicle Care

A. Engine Oil Dipstick. See″Checking Engine Oil″ underEngine Oil on page 9-9.

B. Engine Coolant on page 9-19.C. Washer Fluid on page 9-24.D. Coolant Recovery Tank.

See Engine Coolant onpage 9-19.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 9-9.

F. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9-16.

G. Brakes on page 9-26 andHydraulic Clutch on page 9-15(If Equipped).

H. Engine Compartment FuseBlock.

I. Battery on page 9-28.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

See Jump Starting.K. Automatic Transmission Fluid

Dipstick. See ″Checking theFluid Level″ under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 9-12(If Equipped) (Out of View).

Vehicle Care 9-7

When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see.

9-8 Vehicle Care

A. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 9-9.

B. Engine Coolant on page 9-19.C. Washer Fluid on page 9-24.D. Coolant Recovery Tank.

See Engine Coolant onpage 9-19.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 9-9.

F. Brakes on page 9-26 andHydraulic Clutch on page 9-15(If Equipped).

G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9-16.

H. Engine Compartment FuseBlock.

I. Battery on page 9-28.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

See Jump Starting.K. Automatic Transmission Fluid

Dipstick. See ″Checking theFluid Level″ under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 9-12(If Equipped) (Out of View).

Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and thevehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for the location of the engine oildipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is not done,the oil dipstick might not show theactual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

Vehicle Care 9-9

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the indent atthe tip of the dipstick, add at leastone liter/quart of the recommendedoil. This section explains what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 11-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above the upperhole, the engine could bedamaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all theway back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

1.8L Engine

2.4L Engine

9-10 Vehicle Care

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not useother viscosity oils suchas SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburst symbolon the container. This symbolindicates that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GM StandardGM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold,where the temperature fallsbelow −29°C (−20°F), use eitheran SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or anSAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provideeasier cold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures. Alwaysuse an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thestarburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

When to Change Engine OilChange the oil and filter every8 000 km (5,000 miles) or3 months, whichever occurs first.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10-3.

Vehicle Care 9-11

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluidWhen to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission FluidCheck the fluid in the transmissionand differential at the intervals listedin Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10-3, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidThis operation can be difficult, youmay choose to have this done at thedealer/retailer service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure tofollow all the instructions here,or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures areabove 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especiallyin hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 158°F to176°F (70°C to 80°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 15 miles (24 km)when outside temperaturesare above 50°F (10°C). If it iscolder than 50°F (10°C), youmay have to drive longer.

9-12 Vehicle Care

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, positionthe shift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off theengine, follow these steps:

The automatic transmissiondipstick has an orange handleand is located near the front of theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for more information on location.

1. Release the tab and pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull itback out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be between thetwo dimples in the hot range.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way;then press the tab down to lockthe dipstick in place.

1.8L shown

Vehicle Care 9-13

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use.Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bringthe level into the area betweendimples on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel,add enough fluid at the dipstickhole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid,generally less than one pint(0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage yourtransmission. Too much can meanthat some of the fluid could comeout and fall on hot engine parts orexhaust system parts, starting afire. Too little fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

3. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlierin this section.

4. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstickback in all the way; then pressthe tab down to lock the dipstickin place.

Manual TransmissionFluidWhen to CheckA good time to have your manualtransmission fluid level checkedis when the engine oil is changed.However, the fluid in your manualtransmission does not requirechanging.

How to CheckThis operation can be difficult, youmay choose to have this doneat your dealer/retailer servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, oryou could get a false reading.

9-14 Vehicle Care

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage yourtransmission. Too much can meanthat some of the fluid could comeout and fall on hot engine parts orexhaust system parts, starting afire. Too little fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when yourengine is off, the vehicle is parked ona level place and the transmissionis cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transmission case.

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level isup to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, installthe plug and be sure it is fullyseated. If the fluid level is low,add more fluid as described inthe next steps.

How to Add FluidHere is how to add fluid. Referto the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of fluid touse. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 10-15.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole.Add only enough fluid to bringthe fluid level up to the bottomof the filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure theplug is fully seated.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in yourvehicle is self-adjusting. The mastercylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the fluid unless you suspectthere is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

The hydraulic clutch and brakemaster cylinder use the samereservoir.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have the systeminspected and repaired.

Vehicle Care 9-15

When to Check and Whatto Use

The reservoir is located at the backof the engine compartment, on thedriver side of the vehicle. EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often you shouldcheck the fluid level in your mastercylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 10-3 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 10-15.

How to Check and Add FluidCheck that the fluid level is ator above the MIN mark. If the levelis below the MIN mark, see theinstructions on the reservoir cap.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter isin the engine compartment onthe driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for more informationon location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterIf you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the aircleaner/filter at each engineoil change. Replace the filterevery 30,000 miles (48 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10-3 for more information.

9-16 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filterremove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Release the two clips that holdthe cover.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Reinstall the cover.

1.8L Engine

Vehicle Care 9-17

1. Release the three clips that holdthe cover.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.


{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off,and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filteris off, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whenyou are driving.

2.4L Engine

9-18 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemWhen it is safe lift the hood:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Pressure CapC. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe coolant in the vehicle shouldlast for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occursfirst. When coolant is addedor changed, use DEX-COOL®

coolant.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If there is a problemwith engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating on page 9-23.

Vehicle Care 9-19

What to UseUse a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant, which will not damagealuminum parts. If this coolantmixture is used, nothing elseneeds to be added.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the proper coolantmixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, the engine couldget too hot but would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

• Gives freezing protection down to−34°F (− 38°C).

• Gives boiling protection up to265°F (129°C).

• Protects against rust andcorrosion.

• Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

• Lets the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL can cause prematureengine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing

sooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL (silicate-free)coolant in your vehicle.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When the engine is cold,the coolant level should be at LOW,or a little higher. When the engineis warm, the level should be up toFULL, or a little higher. If it is not,there could be a leak at the pressurecap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the coolingsystem.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe coolant recovery tank.

9-20 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Tank

If you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the coolant recovery tank, butbe careful not to spill it.

Occasionally check the coolant levelin the radiator. For information onhow to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 9-19.

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to yourcooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Your vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, your enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a propercoolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

Vehicle Care 9-21

How to Add Coolant to theRadiatorWhen the coolant in the coolantrecovery tank is at the FULL mark,start the vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues,there is one more thing that canbe done. Add the proper coolantmixture directly to the radiator butbe sure the cooling system iscool before you do it.

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn thesurge tank pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including thesurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system and

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

surge tank pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

{ CAUTION

Turning the radiator pressure capwhen the engine and radiator arehot can allow steam and scaldingliquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recoverytank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator.Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when theengine and radiator are hot.

1. Remove the pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including thepressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise until it firststops. Do not press down whileturning the pressure cap.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down while turning.Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the propercoolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. For moreinformation about the propercoolant mixture look earlier inthis section.

4. Then fill the coolant recoverytank to the FULL mark.

9-22 Vehicle Care

5. Put the cap back on the coolantrecovery tank, but leave thepressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neck maybe lower. If the level is lower,add more of the proper coolantmixture through the filler neckuntil the level reaches the baseof the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap.At any time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the ears on thepressure cap are in line withthe vent tube.

Engine OverheatingA coolant temperature gage islocated on the vehicle’s instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 4-11.

Check to see if the electric enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicle needsservice.

If no problem is apparent, but thecoolant level is not at or above theFULL mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolanton page 9-19 for more informationabout the proper coolant mixture.

If the coolant inside the coolantrecovery tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked ona level surface.

If Steam Is Coming From YourEngine

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

Notice: If the engine catchesfire because of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Vehicle Care 9-23

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but steam is not heard orseen escaping, the problem maynot be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little toohot when the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

• Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam, try this fora minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idlein N (Neutral) while stopped. If itis safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on the heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

If the overheat warning is no longerdisplayed, the vehicle can be driven.Just to be safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, continue to drive.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whilethe vehicle is parked. If the warningis still displayed, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicleuntil it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hoodbut to get service help right away.

Power Steering FluidThe vehicle has electronic powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid. If you suspect aproblem, see your dealer/retailer.

Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

9-24 Vehicle Care

How to Check WindshieldWasher Fluid

To check windshield washer fluid.

1. Pull dipstick out of windshieldwasher reservoir.

2. Washer fluid should fill the holesbetween the LOW (B) andNORMAL (A) mark.

3. If the fluid reads LOW (B) addfluid.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the holes of the dipstickare filled between the LOW (B)and NORMAL (A). See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9-6 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not cleanas well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.

Vehicle Care 9-25

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 11-2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

9-26 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and, onmanual transmission vehicles, theclutch hydraulic system use thesame reservoir. The reservoir is filledwith DOT-3 brake fluid as indicatedon the reservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake and/orclutch hydraulic system can alsocause a low fluid level. Have thebrake and/or clutch hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakesand/or clutch will not work well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings are installed.

Add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 4-17.

Vehicle Care 9-27

What to Add

Use only new DOT-3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake or clutch hydraulic system,the brakes or clutch might notwork well. This could cause acrash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake or clutchhydraulic system parts.For example, just a few dropsof mineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brake or clutchhydraulic system can damagebrake or clutch hydraulicsystem parts so badly that theywill have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Be careful not to spill brakefluid on the vehicle. If you do,wash it off immediately.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenancefree battery. When it is time for anew battery, see your dealer/retailerfor one that has the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery’s label. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9-6 for battery location.

{WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

9-28 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Startingon page 9-69 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicleis driven infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This helps keep the batteryfrom running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over anextended period of time.

All-Wheel DriveIf you have an all-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure to perform thelubricant checks described in thissection.

Transfer Case(Power Transfer Unit)When to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10-3.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a level surface.If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of thefiller plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricant touse. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

Carrier Assembly-Differential(Rear Drive Module)

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10-3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of thefiller plug hole. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem; check and haveit repaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricant touse. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

Vehicle Care 9-29

Starter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 8-33.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start theengine. The vehicle should startonly when the clutch pedal ispushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts whenthe clutch pedal is not pushedall the way down, contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

Wiper BladeReplacementFront Windshield WiperWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected at least twice a yearfor wear or cracking.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. To removethe wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

9-30 Vehicle Care

2. Push the release lever and slidethe wiper assembly toward thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Slide the new wiper assemblyinto place.

4. Push the release lever down tolock into place.

Rear Windshield Wiper

1. Disengage the two pins anddisconnect the rear wiper arm bypulling them up.

Vehicle Care 9-31

2. Raise the wiper arm until itcomes off.You will hear a clicking soundwhen the arm comes off.

3. Push the rear wiper assemblystraight into the rear wiper arm.

4. Reengage the two pins to therear wiper arm by pushingthem down.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

9-32 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 9-37.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps and ParkingLamps

A. High-beam HeadlampB. Turn Signal Lamp/Parking LampC. Low-beam Headlamp

High-beam and Low-beamHeadlampsTo replace the High-beam orLow-beam Headlamp:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9-5.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it outof the headlamp assembly.

Vehicle Care 9-33

3. Unplug the connector whilepressing down on the release tab.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out.

5. Push the new bulb straightin until it clicks.

6. Push the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly and turnit clockwise to secure it inits original location.

Front Turn Signal Lamp andParking LampTo replace the Front Turn SignalLamp or Parking Lamp:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9-5.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pullit out of the lamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe bulb socket.

4. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks.

5. Push the bulb socket intothe lamp assembly and turnclockwise to secure it in itsoriginal location.

9-34 Vehicle Care

Taillamps

A. Turn Signal LampB. Stoplamp/Sidemarker

Lamp/TaillampC. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the storagecompartment cover in therear cargo area of the vehicleto access the bulbs.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

Passenger Side

Driver Side

Vehicle Care 9-35

4. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.

5. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to secure.

6. Push the bulb socket in and turnit clockwise to secure.


License Plate LampTo replace the license platelamp bulb:

1. Press the tabs in to disengagethem and remove the licenseplate lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the license plate assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight out ofthe bulb socket.

4. Push the new bulb straight in thebulb socket until it clicks.

5. Push the bulb socket straight intothe license plate assembly andturn it clockwise to secure it.

6. Reinstall the license plateassembly into its original locationmaking sure the tabs reengage.

9-36 Vehicle Care

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

High-beamHeadlamps 9005

Low-beamHeadlamps 9006

Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuit untilthe until the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused by electricalproblems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:

• Headlamp Wiring

• Windshield Wiper Motor

• Power Windows and other PowerAccessories

Headlamp WiringAn electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Vehicle Care 9-37

Windshield WipersIf the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice, may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear iceand heavy snow from the windshieldbefore using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snowor ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links. This greatlyreduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

This engine compartment fuse blockis located in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehiclenear the air cleaner. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

9-38 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

1 ElectricCooling Fans

2 ElectricCooling Fans

3

Antilock BrakingSystem (ABS),Vehicle StabilityControl System

Fuses Usage

4ABS, VehicleStability ControlSystem

5 Air ConditioningSystem

6 Charging System

7 Electric PowerSteering

Fuses Usage

8Emission ControlSystem Main, Horn,Ignition 2

9 Headlamp Main

10 Emission ControlSystem 2

11

Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem

12 Driver SideHeadlamp

13 Passenger SideHeadlamp

14

Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp,Front Foglamps

15Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

16

Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem

Vehicle Care 9-39

Fuses Usage

17 Turn Signal Lamps,Hazard Lamps

18 Charging System

19

Starting System,Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem

20

Starting System,Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem

21 Empty22 Starting System

23 Engine ImmobilizerSystem

Fuses Usage

24

Main Body ECU,Gages, DaytimeRunningLights (DRL),Air ConditioningSystem, WirelessRemote Control,Theft DeterrentSystem

25 Audio System

26Interior Lamps,Personal Lamps,Clock

27 Spare28 Spare29 Spare30 Audio System31 OnStar®

Fuses Usage

32

MultiportFuel InjectionSystem/SequentialMultiport FuelInjection System,Horn, EmissionControl System 1,Emission ControlSystem 2

33 Horn

34

Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem, Horn,Ignition, Meter

35 PTC Heater 136 PTC Heater 3

37 Air ConditioningInverter

9-40 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The fuse block is located under theinstrument panel on the driver side ofthe vehicle. Fuses Usage

1

Parking Lamps,License PlateLamps, Taillamp,Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem, InstrumentPanel Lights

2 Switch Illumination

Fuses Usage3 Power Windows4 Power Windows5 Power Windows6 Sunroof

7Cigarette Lighter,Accessory PowerOutlet

Vehicle Care 9-41

Fuses Usage

8

Outside RearviewMirrors, AudioSystem, Main BodyEngine ControlUnit (ECU), Clock,Brake TransmissionShift Interlock

9 Empty10 Empty

11

Airbag System,Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem, FrontPassenger OccupantClassificationSystem

12 Gages and Meters

13Air ConditioningSystem, RearWindow Defogger

14 Windshield Wipers15 Rear Window Wipers

Fuses Usage16 Windshield Washer

17

Main Body ECU,Electric PowerSteering, ElectricCooling Fans,Brake TransmissionShift Interlock,Antilock BrakingSystem (ABS),Multiport FuelInjection System/Sequential MultiportFuel InjectionSystem, TirePressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS),Vehicle StabilityControl System

18

Back-up Lamps,Charging System,Rear WindowDefogger

19 Onboard DiagnosisSystem

Fuses Usage

20

Stoplamps, CenterHigh-MountedStoplamps (CHMSL),ABS, VehicleStability ControlSystem, MultiportFuel InjectionSystem/SequentialMultiport FuelInjection System,Brake TransmissionShift Interlock

21 Power Door LockSystem

22

Outside RearviewMirrors, AudioSystem, Main BodyECU, Clock, BrakeTransmission ShiftInterlock, CigaretteLighter

23 All-Wheel DriveSystem

24 Front Foglamps

9-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

25

Ignition, OutsideRearview Mirrors,Audio System, MainBody ECU, Clock,Brake TransmissionShift Interlock,Cigarette Lighter

26

Rear WindowDefogger, HeatedMirrors, MultiportFuel InjectionSystem/SequentialMultiport FuelInjection System

27 Power Windows

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comeswith high-quality tires madeby a leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have questions aboutyour tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{ CAUTION

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold. See TirePressure on page 9-49.

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, puncturedor broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

Vehicle Care 9-43

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the TireIdentification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and underthe tread.

(E) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire Quality Gradingon page 9-58.

(F) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample

9-44 Vehicle Care

(A) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 65 mph(105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a

regular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If your vehicle has acompact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 9-68 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 9-62.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 60 psi (420 kPa). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 9-49.

(F) Tire Size: A combinationof letters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

Compact Spare Tire Example

Vehicle Care 9-45

Tire DesignationsTire Size

The following illustrationshows an example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S.Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents theload carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

9-46 Vehicle Care

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 9-49.

Curb Weight: The weight ofa motor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire isin compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8-12.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Vehicle Care 9-47

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curb weight,accessory weight, vehiclecapacity weight, and productionoptions weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 9-49 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support fora tire and upon which thetire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tireindicating the maximum speedat which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 9-56.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9-58.

9-48 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyonetell you that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road

hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 8-12.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load yourvehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.

Vehicle Care 9-49

When to Check

Check your tires once amonth or more. Do not forgetto check the compact sparetire, if the vehicle has one.The compact spare should be at60 psi (420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 9-68.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap fromthe tire valve stem. Press thetire gage firmly onto the valveto get a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) uses radio andsensor technology to check tirepressure levels. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

9-50 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped witha tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct

tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when the systemis not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flashfor approximately one minute andthen remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9-52 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaSee Radio Frequency Statement(US, Can) on page 12-16 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andRSS-210/211 of Industry andScience Canada.

Vehicle Care 9-51

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS warns the driver when alow tire pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted ontoeach tire and wheel assembly,excluding the spare tire andwheel assembly.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the low tire pressurewarning light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, comes on.

This light also comes on for afew seconds and then goes off whenyou turn the ignition to ON/RUN.This indicates the TPMS isfunctioning properly. If the low-tirepressure warning light comes onwhile driving the vehicle, the systemmay have detected a low-tirecondition. You need to stop as soonas possible and check the tires.

The low tire pressure warninglight may come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) aregetting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to the vehicle, showsthe size of the vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8-12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 9-49.

The vehicle’s TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 9-54, Tire Rotation onpage 9-55 and Tires on page 9-43.

9-52 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction LightThe TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. The low tire warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not havea TPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off onceyou re-install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

• The initialization (reset) procedurefailed. See “TPMS Reset” later inthis section.

• One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The TPMS malfunction lightshould go off when the TPMSsensors are installed and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match the vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 9-56.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

• If tire chains are installed on thevehicle.

• If there is a lot of snow or icearound the wheels or wheelhousings.

• If a window tint that affects theradio wave signals is installed.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightcomes on and stays on.

Vehicle Care 9-53

TPMS ResetThe TPMS sensors and transmittershave unique identification codes.Anytime you replace a TPMS sensoror transmitter the identification codesneed to be registered and the TPMSneeds to be reset (initialized). Whenthe system is initialized, the currentair pressure in the tires is set as thetire pressure benchmark. The tirepressure warning system determinesdecreased air pressure by comparingtire pressure to the benchmarkpressure stored in the TPMS.

Do not reset the TPMS without firstcorrecting the cause of a low-tirecondition.

To reset the system:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe placeand apply the parking brake.Turn the engine off.

2. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

3. Adjust the tire pressure of all theinstalled tires to the specifiedcold tire inflation pressure levelindicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached tothe vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

5. Press and hold the tire pressurewarning reset switch until the tirepressure warning light flashesslowly on/off three times.Wait for a few minutes with theignition in ON/RUN, and then turnthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF.

If the low-tire pressure warninglight does not flash three timeswhile you press and hold thereset button, the reset has failed.Repeat the reset process. If thereset cannot be performed, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If you press the tire pressure resetswitch while the vehicle is moving,the reset is not performed. If youpress the tire pressure reset switchaccidentally and initialization isperformed, adjust the tire pressure tothe specified level and perform thereset procedure again.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle’stires, including the spare tire, ifthe vehicle has one, for signs ofwear or damage. See When It IsTime for New Tires on page 9-56for more information.

9-54 Vehicle Care

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10-3.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 9-56 and WheelReplacement on page 9-60 formore information.

When rotating the vehicle’s tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Tires should only be moved fromfront to rear and rear to front onthe same side of the vehicle.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures to theamounts shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

See Tire Pressure on page 9-49and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 9-62.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specificationson page 11-2.

Vehicle Care 9-55

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influencewhen you need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)or less of tread remaining.

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not being used.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. Multipleconditions affect how fast this agingtakes place, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflation

pressure maintenance. With propercare and maintenance tires typicallywear out before they degrade due toage. If you are unsure about theneed to replace the tires as they getolder, consult the tire manufacturerfor more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. If youneed replacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tires thatare the same size, brand, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias-belted tires) as thevehicle’s original tires. This way, thevehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 9-44 for additional information.

9-56 Vehicle Care

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will help keepthe vehicle performing most like it didwhen the tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of the vehicle. See TireInspection on page 9-54 and TireRotation on page 9-55.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to your

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

vehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily,as it was developed for useon your vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 9-68.

{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warningif tires not recommended for thevehicle are installed. Tires that donot match the original equipmenttires could give a low-pressurewarning that is higher or lower thanthe proper warning level you wouldget with original equipment tires.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 9-50.

The vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 8-12,for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label andits location on the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 9-57

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti-lockbrakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, theperformance of these systemscan be affected.

See Buying New Tires on page 9-56and Accessories and Modificationson page 9-3 for additionalinformation.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.

The grades are molded onthe sidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passengercars and light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirementsand additional General MotorsTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

9-58 Vehicle Care

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear oneand a half (1.5) times as wellon the government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A representhigher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.It should be noted that thetemperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Vehicle Care 9-59

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheelleaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts,replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the rightwheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control.You could have a collision inwhich you or others could beinjured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9-62for more information.

9-60 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used or howfar it has been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If youhave to replace a wheel, use anew GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

If the vehicle has P215/45R18size tires, do not use tire chains.There is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

the brakes, suspension or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjustor remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, anddo not spin the wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the fronttires.

Notice: If the vehicle has a tiresize other than P215/45R18 sizetires, use tire chains only wherelegal and only when you must.Use only SAE Class “S” typechains that are the proper sizefor the tires. Install them on thefront tires and tighten them astightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting thevehicle, stop and retighten them.If the contact continues, slowdown until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels withchains on will damage the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 9-61

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle’s tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire,it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever havea blowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out ofthe traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be

very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently brake to a stop,well off the road if possible.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 5-3.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall on you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured or even killed. Finda level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

9-62 Vehicle Care

CAUTION (Continued)

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire ChangingRemoving the Spare Tire andTools

A. Compact Spare TireB. JackC. Cargo Area Floor(s)D. Tire/Wheel Retainer NutE. Jack HandleF. Wheel Wrench

To remove the spare tire and tools:

1. Turn the two lock knobs on thecargo area floor (C) to UNLOCK.

2. Lift up and remove both ofthe cargo area floors (C).

Vehicle Care 9-63

3. Remove the hook holdingthe jack (B) and removethe jack (B).

4. Remove the jack handle (E)and wheel wrench (F) fromthe passenger side of thecargo area.

5. Remove the tire/wheelretainer (D) from the compactspare tire (A) and removethe compact spare tire (A).See Compact Spare Tire onpage 9-68.

6. Place the compact spare tire (A)next to the flat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before

proceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 9-62.

2. If the vehicle has steel wheelswith plastic wheel nut caps,loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.You may need the wheel wrenchto loosen them. Do not pry offwheel covers that have plasticwheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover and setit off to the side.

4. Attach the jack handle to the jackand turn clockwise to raise thelift head a little.

9-64 Vehicle Care

5. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Do not remove them yet.

6. Position the jack and raise thejack lift head to fit over the carflange between the two notches.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, besure to fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

7. Turn the jack handle clockwise.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the compact spare tireto fit underneath the wheel well.

Vehicle Care 9-65

8. Remove the wheel nuts and theflat tire.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it is fastened,can make wheel nuts becomeloose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident.When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9-62.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces and spare wheel.

11. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

{ CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9-66 Vehicle Care

12. Reinstall the wheel nuts withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel. Tighten eachnut by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

13. Turn the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lowerthe jack completely.

{ CAUTION

Wheel nuts that are improperlyor incorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 11-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,

evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 11-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence asshown.

Vehicle Care 9-67

Storing the CompactSpare Tire

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

A. Compact Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Jack

C. Cargo Area FloorD. Tire/Wheel Retainer NutE. Jack HandleF. Wheel Wrench

1. Place the jack handle (E) andwheel wrench (F) back in theiroriginal location in the passengerside of the cargo area.

2. Place the jack (B) back in itsoriginal location on the driverside of the cargo area and closethe latch over the jack (B).

3. Place the compact spare tire (A),valve stem pointed down, backin its original location in thecenter of the cargo area.

4. Turn the tire/wheel retainernut (D) clockwise to secure iton the compact spare tire (A).

5. Close the cargo area floor (C).

Compact Spare TireThe compact spare tire was fullyinflated when the vehicle was new,but it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12 for the correct inflationpressure.

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)when driving with a spare tire.

The spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. Replace it witha regular tire as soon as possible.

9-68 Vehicle Care

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheeland other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the temporary spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the temporary sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on the compact spare.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connectionyou do not want. You would notbe able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

Vehicle Care 9-69

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission inNEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle.See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 9-6 formore information on location.

{ CAUTION

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a batterycan cause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don’t, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

9-70 Vehicle Care

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a shortthat would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. Anddo not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. To access the remote negativeon the 1.8L engine, the cover willneed to be removed. To removethe engine cover raise the rear ofthe engine cover to remove therear clips and the front of theengine cover to remove thetwo front clips

1.8 L4 Engine

Vehicle Care 9-71

Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to the negativeterminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or toa remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cablesare connected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do nottouch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted MetalEngine Part

B. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

2.4L L4 Engine Jumper Cable Removal

9-72 Vehicle Care

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground. Consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabled vehiclemust be towed. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12-6.

To tow the vehicle behindanother vehicle for recreationalpurposes — such as behinda motorhome, see RecreationalVehicle Towing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing is towingthe vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground. Dolly towing is towingthe vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Vehicle Care 9-73

Here are some important thingsto consider before recreationalvehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of thetowing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Is the proper equipment going tobe used? See your dealer/retaileror trailering professional foradditional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle for along trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed.

Dinghy TowingIf the vehicle has an automatictransmission, it cannot be dinghytowed. See “Dolly Towing” for moreinformation regarding towing thevehicle.

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it can be dinghytowed.

When dinghy towing, be sure tofollow the posted legal speed limit.

1. Put the shift lever in Neutral.

2. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY to avoidlocking the steering wheel.Make sure the audio systemis turned off and that nothing isplugged into the power outlets.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engineidle for more than three minutesbefore driving the vehicle.

Do not tow the vehicle from therear. The vehicle could be badlydamaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)All-wheel-drive vehicles must notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheels offof the ground.

9-74 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow the front-wheel-drive vehicleusing a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park)for an automatic transmissionor Neutral for a manualtransmission.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designedfor towing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Appearance Care

Exterior CareCleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water,a soft cloth and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Vehicle Care 9-75

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasiveand made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle’s finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subjectto aging, weather and chemicalfallout that can take their toll overa period of years. You can help tokeep the paint finish looking newby keeping the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should be cleanedregularly to keep their luster. Washwith water or use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protective trim,never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

9-76 Vehicle Care

Washing the VehicleTo preserve the vehicle’s finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acidor abrasives, as they can damagethe paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’

directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safety precautionsand appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towelto avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damageor removal of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance forthe undercarriage. Check with thecar wash manager before usingthe automatic car wash.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may be required.See “Fluids and Lubricants” in theIndex of the “Maintenance andWarranty and Owner assistanceInformation” manual.

Vehicle Care 9-77

Wheels and Trim — Aluminumor ChromeThe vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soapand water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry witha soft clean towel. A wax maythen be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels,could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polishon chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

9-78 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking. Replace thewiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval

TiresUse a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintainingthe vehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, andexhaust system even though theyhave corrosion protection.

Vehicle Care 9-79

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaceson the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle’s interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage to thecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Stains should be removedquickly as extreme heat could causethem to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Newspapersand garments that can transfer colorto home furnishings can also transfercolor to the vehicle’s interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brushwith soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has productsfor cleaning the vehicle’s interior.When cleaning the vehicle’s interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces that arebeing cleaned. Permanent damagecan result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

9-80 Vehicle Care

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle’s interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or anyother sharp object to remove asoil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and does notimprove the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

• Damage to the vehicle’s interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, alwaystry to remove them first with plainwater or club soda. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

Vehicle Care 9-81

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabricor carpet after the cleaning process.

LeatherTo remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,or spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance andfeel of the leather and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents toclean the vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesTo remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soapsolution can be used to gentlyremove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plasticsurfaces. Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plasticsurfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organicsolvents to clean the vehicle’sinterior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

9-82 Vehicle Care

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor MatsThe driver side floor mat is held inplace by two locator hooks.The floor mat must be properlyplaced on the floor so that it doesnot block the movement of theaccelerator pedal.

How to Remove and Replacethe Floor Mat

To remove the floor mat, pull up onthe rear of the mat to disconnectit from the locator hooks.

To reinstall the floor mat, line up theopenings in the floor mat over thelocator hooks and push downinto place.

Vehicle Care 9-83

✍ NOTES

9-84 Vehicle Care

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information .............10-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance ........10-3

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids and

Lubricants .......................10-15Maintenance Replacement

Parts ..............................10-17

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records .........10-18

General InformationImportant: Keep engine oil at theproper level and change asrecommended.

Have you purchased the GMProtection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties.See the Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for details.

Notice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribed inthis manual are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Proper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can even affectthe quality of the air we breathe.Improper fluid levels or the wrong tireinflation can increase the level ofemissions from the vehicle. To helpprotect the environment, and to keepthe vehicle in good condition, be sureto maintain the vehicle properly.

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it.You might drive very short distancesonly a few times a week. Or youmight drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather.You might use the vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or you might drive it towork, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

Service and Maintenance 10-1

Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how you drive.If you have any questions on how tokeep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8-12.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 8-39.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 10-3 shouldbe performed when indicated.

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance workon a vehicle can be dangerous.In trying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 9-4.

Some maintenance services canbe complex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 12-12.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 10-17. When the vehicle isserviced, make sure these are used.All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before youor anyone else drives the vehicle.We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

10-2 Service and Maintenance

ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this scheduleup to 192 000 km (120,000 miles)should be repeated after 192 000 km(120,000 miles) at the same intervalsfor the life of this vehicle.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify theemissions warranty or limit recallliability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakesis during tire rotation. See TireRotation on page 9-55.

8 000 km (5,000 Miles)❑ Change engine oil and filter

(or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation onpage 9-55 for proper rotationpattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filterif vehicle is driven in dustyconditions. Replace filter ifnecessary.



❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 9-55 for proper rotationpattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)






❑ Inspect passenger compartmentair filter.

❑ Change transfer case fluid whendoing frequent trailer towing.

❑ Change rear differential fluid whendoing frequent trailer towing.













❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter(or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9-16 formore information.

❑ Check restraint system. Makesure the safety belt reminder lightand safety belt assemblies areworking properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job,have it repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced.Also see Safety System Checkon page 2-21.

❑ Replace passenger compartmentair filter.



❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket,and lines for damage or leaks(or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts asneeded. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transmission fluidevery 48 000 km (30,000 miles)only if your vehicle is used to towa trailer.












❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 9-55 for proper rotationpattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)




❑ Change rear differential fluidwhen doing frequent trailertowing.


















❑ Inspect engine accessory drivebelts (or every 48 months,whichever occurs first). Visuallyinspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage.Replace belt if necessary.An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect for tappet noise andengine vibration. Adjust valveclearance to factory specificationsif necessary (or every 48 months,whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.



❑ Change automatictransmission fluid every96 000 km (60,000 miles) if thevehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 32°C (90°F) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle underany of these conditions, the fluiddoes not require changing.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15 forthe proper fluid to use.

















❑ Inspect engine accessory drivebelts (or 12 months since lastinspection). An Emission ControlService.


















❑ Inspect engine accessory drivebelts (or 12 months since lastinspection). An Emission ControlService.















❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filterif driving in dusty conditions.Replace filter if necessary.






















❑ Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service.

❑ Inspect for tappet noise andengine vibration. Adjust valveclearance to factory specificationsif necessary (or every 48 months,whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.



❑ Change automatic transmissionfluid every 96 000 km(60,000 miles) if the vehicle ismainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 32°C (90°F) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle underany of these conditions, the fluiddoes not require changing.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15 forthe proper fluid to use.

240 000 km (150,000 Miles)❑ Drain, flush, and refill the

cooling system (or every5 years, whichever occurs first).This service can be complex; youshould have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 9-19 for whatto use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressurecap, and neck. Pressure testcooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.


At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level andadd the proper oil if necessary.See Engine Oil on page 9-9.

Notice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly and keep itat the proper level. Failure to keepthe engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to the enginenot covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level andadd DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureif necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 9-19.

Windshield Washer Fluid LevelCheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washer fluidreservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary. See Washer Fluid onpage 9-24.

Hood Latch Operation Check

Pull the primary hood latchrelease handle inside the vehicle.The secondary latch should keepthe hood from opening all the waywhen the primary latch is released.Make sure the hood closes firmly.See Hood on page 9-5.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation Check

Inspect the tires and make surethe tires are inflated to the correctpressures. Do not forget to check thespare tire. See Tires on page 9-43.

At Least Twice a YearWiper Blade Check

Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination. Cleanthe windshield and wiper blades,if contaminated. Replace wiperblades that are worn or damaged.See Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 9-30 and Exterior Care onpage 9-75 for more information.

Weatherstrip Lubrication

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weathermore frequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 10-15.

Fluid Level Check

Check the power steering pump, rearaxle, transfer case, and automaticor manual transmission fluid levelsand add as needed. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 9-12or Manual Transmission Fluid onpage 9-14. Check for leaks. A fluidloss in these systems could indicatea problem. Have the systeminspected and repaired at once.


At Least Once a YearKey Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinderswith the lubricant specified inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15.

Seat Operation CheckMake sure the head restraints stayin position and all seat latcheslock. Check that the recliner holdsby pushing and pulling the seatbackwhile it is reclined.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assembly,secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, hood andbody door hinges, rear compartment,and any folding seat hardware.Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10-15 tellsyou what to use. More frequentlubrication might be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch CheckSee Starter Switch Check onpage 9-30.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be surethere is enough room around thevehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 8-33.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission LockCheck

While parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shiftlever position.

• For automatic transmissionvehicles, the ignition shouldturn to LOCK/OFF only whenthe shift lever is in P (Park).

• For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition shouldturn to LOCK/OFF only ifyou push the ignition key infarther, while turning it towardLOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.


Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park) MechanismCheck

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’sholding ability: With the enginerunning and transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain waterto flush any corrosive materials fromthe underbody. Take care to cleanthoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsThese inspections and servicesshould be performed at least twice ayear, for instance, each spring andfall. You should let your dealer/retailer do these jobs. Make sure anynecessary repairs are completedat once.


Proper procedures to perform theseservices can be found in a servicemanual. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 12-12.

• Inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering systemfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspectpower steering cables for properhook-up, binding, cracks, chafing,etc. Clean and then inspect thedrive axle boot seals for damage,tears, or leakage. Replace seals ifnecessary.

• Inspect the complete exhaustsystem. Inspect the body nearthe exhaust system. Look forbroken, damaged, missing, orout-of-position parts as well asopen seams, holes, looseconnections, or other conditionswhich could cause a heat build-upin the floor pan or could letexhaust fumes into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 8-23.

• Inspect the complete fuel systemfor damage or leaks.

• Inspect the cooling systemhoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen ordeteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace asneeded. Clean the outside ofthe radiator and air conditioningcondenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of thecooling system and pressure capis recommended at least oncea year.

• Inspect the throttle system forinterference or binding, and fordamaged or missing parts.Replace parts as needed.Replace any components thathave high effort or excessivewear. Do not lubricate acceleratorand cruise control cables.

• Inspect the complete brakesystem. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parkingbrake, etc. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more oftenif your driving habits or conditionsresult in frequent braking.


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 9-9.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 9-19.Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid WS ATF (GM Part No. U.S. 88863400,in Canada 88863401).

Manual TransmissionGM Goodwrench® Synthetic Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190, in Canada 10953477 — 1 quart)or SAE 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.

Manual Transmission Shift Linkage Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Clutch Linkage Pivot Points Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Floor Shift LinkageLubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Rear Axle (All-Wheel Drive) Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345977, in Canada 10953482)or SAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021669, in Canada 89021670)or SAE 80W-90 GL-5 API Hypoid Gear Lubricant.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Numbers Other Part NumbersEngine Air Cleaner/Filter

1.8L L4 Engine 88975792 —2.4L L4 Engine 88975799 —

Engine Oil Filter1.8L L4 Engine* 19185485 —2.4L L4 Engine 88969580 —

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 19184673 —Spark Plugs**

1.8L L4 Engine 19185438 SK20HR11†

2.4L L4 Engine 88969636 SK20R11†IFR6A11††

*Oil Filter Element Kit includes element and seal.**The engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engineperformance.† DENSO†† NGK


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record


Maintenance Record (cont’d)



Maintenance Record (cont’d)



Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ....................11-1Service Parts Identification

Label ...............................11-1

Vehicle DataCapacities and

Specifications ....................11-2Engine Drive Belt Routing .....11-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the driver side. It can be seenthrough the windshield from outsidethe vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates oftitle and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code helps identifythe vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 11-2 for thevehicle’s engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the inside of theglove box. It is very helpful if partsneed to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Technical Data 11-1

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 10-15 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System

1.8L L4 Engine 5.8 qt 5.5 L2.4L L4 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

Engine Oil with Filter1.8L L4 Engine 4.4 qt 4.2 L2.4L L4 Engine 4.5 qt 4.3 L

Fuel Tank 13.2 gal 50 L

11-2 Technical Data

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricTransmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)

1.8L L4 Engine 3.1 qt 2.9 L2.4L L4 Engine 3.7 qt 3.5 L

Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)1.8L L4 Engine 2.0 qt 1.9 L2.4L L4 Engine 2.6 qt 2.5 L

Wheel Nut Torque 76 lb ft 103 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.8L L4 8 AutomaticManual 0.043 in (1.10 mm)

2.4L L4 0 AutomaticManual 0.043 in (1.10 mm)

Technical Data 11-3

Engine Drive BeltRouting

The 1.8L L4 engine drive beltrequires a special tool to service.See your dealer/retailer for service.

1.8L L4 Engine

2.4L L4 Engine

11-4 Technical Data

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer Satisfaction

Procedure .........................12-1Customer Assistance

Offices ..............................12-3Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY)Users ...............................12-4

Online Owner Center ...........12-4GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ...........................12-5Roadside Assistance

Program ...........................12-6Scheduling Service

Appointments ....................12-8Courtesy Transportation

Program ...........................12-8Collision Damage Repair .....12-10Service Publications

Ordering Information .........12-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to

the United StatesGovernment .....................12-13

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment .....................12-13

Reporting Safety Defectsto General Motors ............12-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording

and Privacy .....................12-14Event Data Recorders ........12-14OnStar® ............................12-15Navigation System .............12-15Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ..........12-16Radio Frequency

Statement (US, Can) ........12-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toPontiac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer’s sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service, orparts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

Customer Information 12-1

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call thePontiac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-762-2737. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

When contacting Pontiac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: BothGeneral Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you can file with the BBB AutoLine Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program priorto filing a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

12-2 Customer Information

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,or call the General MotorsCustomer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesPontiac encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — CustomerAssistancePontiac Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994


Canada — CustomerAssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas — CustomerAssistancePlease contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistanceGeneral Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S. cancommunicate with Pontiac by dialing:1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/pontiacInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find Pontiac dealers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries


Other Helpful Links:

Pontiac — www.pontiac.com

Pontiac Merchandise —www.pontiacmall.com

Help Center — www.pontiac.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected sectionof www.gm.ca where you cansave information on GM vehicles,get personalized offers, and usehandy tools and forms withgreater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, or schedulea service appointment by addingthe vehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you upto $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a verylimited period of time from the date ofvehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Texttelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.


General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743); (Texttelephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following information ready:• Your name, home address, and

home telephone number• Telephone number of your

location• Location of the vehicle• Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to an owneror driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel forthe vehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicle ifyou are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this service isgiven.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Pontiac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, or snow.


• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibility forthe repair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. There isa limit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must be over250 Kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair order. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

• Alternative Service:If assistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give youpermission to get local emergencyroad service. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.


Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot bescheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keepdriving it until it can be scheduledfor service, unless, of course, theproblem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask forinstructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, youare urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with the Bumperto Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extendedpowertrain, and hybrid specificwarranty in both the U.S. andCanada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of thedealer’s area.


Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofthe dealer’s shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements varyand may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, orrental usage beyond the completionof the repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.


Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collisionparts are your best choice to ensurethat your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain yourGM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit premature

durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.


Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in yourGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle bylimiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collisionparts. Some insurance companieswill not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance,we recommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursIf there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing see RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12-6.

Gather the following information:

• Driver’s name, address, phonenumber

• Driver’s license number

• Owner’s name, address, phonenumber

• Vehicle license plate

• Vehicle make, model andmodel year

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Insurance company and policynumber

• General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier inthis section.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 2-28.


Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarketparts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to

have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurance companyis paying for the repairs, you are notobligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair and partschoices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additionaltechnical service information neededto knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist inthe diagnosis and service of yourvehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee


Current and Past Model OrderFormsTechnical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World WideWeb at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tosafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9


Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a numberof sophisticated computers thatrecord information about thevehicle’s performance and howit is driven. For example, yourvehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine andtransmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling


This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDRis needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or, ifthe vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on datacollection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 4-23 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicletransmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in GM vehiclesdoes not use or record personalinformation or link with any otherGM system containing personalinformation.

Radio FrequencyStatement (US, Can)This vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with RSS-210/211 ofIndustry and Science Canada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


AAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 9-3Accessory Power ................. 8-18Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 2-35Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 8-50Adjustments

Seat, Front ........................ 2-4Seat, Initial Drive ................ 2-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 9-16Air Filter, Passenger

Compartment ..................... 7-4Air Vents .............................. 7-4Airbag System

Check ............................. 2-36How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ..................... 2-28Passenger Sensing

System ........................ 2-29What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 2-27

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See After

an Airbag Inflates? ........ 2-28When Should an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 2-26Where Are the Airbags? ..... 2-24

AirbagsAdding Equipment to the

Vehicle ........................ 2-35Passenger Status

Indicator ....................... 4-13Readiness Light ................ 4-12Servicing Airbag-Equipped

Vehicles ....................... 2-34System Check .................. 2-23

Alarm SystemAnti-Theft .......................... 1-7

All-Wheel Drive ............ 8-31, 9-29All-Wheel-Drive Service

Light ............................... 4-18AM-FM Radio ........................ 6-4Antenna

Satellite Radio ................... 6-9Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................. 8-32Warning Light ................... 4-17

Anti-TheftAlarm System .................... 1-7

Appearance CareExterior ........................... 9-75Interior ............................ 9-80

Ashtrays ............................... 4-8Assistance Program,

Roadside ......................... 12-6Audio Players ........................ 6-9

CD ................................... 6-9MP3 ............................... 6-11

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna ............ 6-8

Audio SystemsRadio Reception ................. 6-8

AutomaticHeadlamp System .............. 5-3

AutomaticTransmission ............ 8-24, 8-27Fluid ............................... 9-12Manual Mode ................... 8-28

Auxiliary Devices .................. 6-14

INDEX i-1

BBattery ............................... 9-28

Jump Starting ................... 9-69Power Protection ................ 5-5

Blade Replacement, Wiper .... 9-30Brakes ............................... 9-26

Antilock ........................... 8-32Fluid ............................... 9-27Parking ........................... 8-33

Braking ................................ 8-4Break-In, New Vehicle .......... 8-16Bulb Replacement ................ 9-37

Fog Lamps ........................ 5-4Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-33Headlamp Aiming .............. 9-32Headlamps ...................... 9-33Headlamps and Parking

Lamps ......................... 9-33License Plate Lamps ......... 9-36Taillamps ......................... 9-35

Buying New Tires ................. 9-56

CCalifornia

Fuel Requirements ............ 8-39Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ................. 9-3Warning ............................ 9-2

Canadian Vehicle Owners .......... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 11-2Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust ................ 8-23Liftgate ............................. 1-6Winter Driving .................... 8-9

CargoCover ............................... 3-2Management System .......... 3-4Tie Downs ......................... 3-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings ............................. iii

CD Player ............................ 6-9Center Console Storage ......... 3-2Chains, Tire ........................ 9-61Charging System Light .......... 4-14Check Engine Lamp ............. 4-14

Child RestraintsInfants and Young

Children ....................... 2-38Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children .................. 2-45Older Children .................. 2-37Securing .................. 2-51, 2-53Systems .......................... 2-41Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 2-43Cigarette Lighter .................... 4-8Circuit Breakers ................... 9-38Climate Control Systems ......... 7-1Cluster, IP ............................ 4-9Clutch, Hydraulic .................. 9-15Collision Damage Repair ..... 12-10Compact Spare Tire ............. 9-68Control of a Vehicle ............... 8-3Coolant

Engine ............................ 9-19Engine Temperature Gage ... 4-11

Cooling System ................... 9-19Courtesy Transportation

Program .......................... 12-8

i-2 INDEX

CoversCargo ............................... 3-2

Cruise Control ..................... 8-36Light ............................... 4-21

Cupholders ........................... 3-1Customer Assistance ............ 12-4

Offices ............................ 12-3Text Telephone (TTY)

Users .......................... 12-4Customer Information

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ..... 12-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure ........................ 12-1

DDamage Repair, Collision .... 12-10Danger, Warnings, and

Cautions .............................. iiiData Recorders

Event ............................ 12-14Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) ..................... 5-2

Defensive Driving ................... 8-2Devices, Auxiliary ................. 6-14Dome Lamps ........................ 5-4Door

Ajar Light ........................ 4-21Locks ............................... 1-5Power Locks ...................... 1-6

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ........ 8-31, 9-29

DrivingBetter Fuel Economy .......... 8-2Characteristics and

Towing Tips .................. 8-44Defensive .......................... 8-2Drunk ............................... 8-3Highway Hypnosis .............. 8-8Hill and Mountain Roads ..... 8-8If the Vehicle is Stuck ....... 8-11Loss of Control .................. 8-6Off-Road Recovery ............. 8-6Vehicle Load Limits ........... 8-12Winter .............................. 8-9

EElectrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ............ 8-50Electrical System

Engine Compartment FuseBlock ........................... 9-38

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...................... 9-38

Instrument Panel FuseBlock ........................... 9-41

Overload ......................... 9-37Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ............... 9-16Check and Service Engine

Soon Lamp .................. 4-14Compartment Overview ....... 9-6Coolant ........................... 9-19Coolant

Temperature Gage ......... 4-11Cooling System ................ 9-19Drive Belt Routing ............. 11-4Exhaust ........................... 8-23Oil ................................... 9-9Overheating ..................... 9-23

INDEX i-3

Engine (cont.)Pressure Light .................. 4-19Running While Parked ....... 8-24Starting ........................... 8-18

Entry Lighting ........................ 5-5Equipment, Towing ............... 8-49Event Data Recorders ......... 12-14Extender, Safety Belt ............ 2-21Exterior Care ....................... 9-75Exterior Lamp Controls ........... 5-1

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 9-16Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 5-3Flash-to-Pass ........................ 5-2Flat Tire .............................. 9-62Flat Tire, Changing ............... 9-63Floor Mats .......................... 9-83Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 9-12Brakes ............................ 9-27Power Steering ................. 9-24Washer ........................... 9-24

Fog LampsBulb Replacement .............. 5-4Light ............................... 4-20

Folding Mirrors .................... 1-10Folding Seatback ................... 2-6Front Seat Position Seats

Adjustment ........................ 2-3Front Seats

Adjustment ........................ 2-4Front Storage ........................ 3-2Fuel ................................... 8-38

Additives ......................... 8-40Economy Driving ................ 8-2Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 8-43Filling the Tank ................. 8-41Fuels in Foreign

Countries ..................... 8-40Gage .............................. 4-10Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-39Low Fuel Warning Light ..... 4-20Recommended ................. 8-39Requirements, California .... 8-39

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse

Block ........................... 9-38Fuses and Circuit

Breakers ...................... 9-38Instrument Panel Fuse

Block ........................... 9-41

GGages

Engine CoolantTemperature ................. 4-11

Fuel ................................ 4-10Odometer ........................ 4-10Speedometer ................... 4-10Tachometer ...................... 4-10Trip Odometer .................. 4-10Warning Lights and

Indicators ....................... 4-8Gasoline

Specifications ................... 8-39General Information

Service and Maintenance ... 10-1Towing ............................ 8-43Vehicle Care ...................... 9-2

Glove Box ............................ 3-1GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program .......................... 12-5

i-4 INDEX

HHalogen Bulbs ..................... 9-33Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 5-3Head Restraints ..................... 2-2

Active ............................... 2-3Headlamps

Aiming ............................ 9-32Automatic .......................... 5-3Bulb Replacement ............. 9-33Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) .................. 5-2Flash-to-Pass ..................... 5-2High-Beam On Light ......... 4-20High/Low Beam Changer ..... 5-2Lamps On Reminder ......... 4-20Parking Lamps ................. 9-33

High-Beam On Light ............. 4-20Highway Hypnosis ................. 8-8Hill and Mountain Roads ......... 8-8Hood ................................... 9-5Hooks and Load Rails ............ 3-4Horn .................................... 4-5How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 2-12Hydraulic Clutch ................... 9-15

IIgnition Positions .................. 8-16Illumination Control ................ 5-4Immobilizer ........................... 1-9Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 2-38Instrument Cluster .................. 4-9Instrument Panel ................... 5-4Interior Care ........................ 9-80Introduction .............................. ii

JJump Starting ...................... 9-69

KKeyless Entry System ............ 1-3Keys .................................... 1-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 9-44Lamps

Daytime Running (DRL) ....... 5-2Dome ............................... 5-4Exterior Controls ................ 5-1

Lamps (cont.)Headlamps and Parking

Lamps ......................... 9-33License Plate ................... 9-36Malfunction Indicator ......... 4-14On Reminder ................... 4-20Reading ............................ 5-5Taillamps ......................... 9-35

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 2-18Latch, Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children ........... 2-45LATCH System

Replacing Parts After aCrash .......................... 2-51

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide ............... 1-6

Lighter, Cigarette ................... 4-8Lighting

Entry ................................ 5-5Lights

Airbag Readiness ............. 4-12Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 4-17Charging System .............. 4-14Cruise Control .................. 4-21Door Ajar ......................... 4-21

INDEX i-5

Lights (cont.)Engine Oil Pressure .......... 4-19Flash-to-Pass ..................... 5-2Fog Lamps ...................... 4-20High-Beam On ................. 4-20High/Low Beam Changer ..... 5-2Low Fuel Warning ............. 4-20Low Washer Fluid

Warning ....................... 4-21Safety Belt Reminders ....... 4-11Security ........................... 4-20Service All-Wheel-Drive ...... 4-18Speed Sensitive Power

Steering (SSPS)Warning ....................... 4-18

StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 4-18Taillamp Indicator .............. 4-21Tire Pressure ................... 4-19Traction Control System

(TCS) Warning .............. 4-19Load Rails and Hooks ............ 3-4Locks

Door ................................. 1-5Power Door ....................... 1-6Safety ............................... 1-6

Loss of Control ..................... 8-6Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 4-20

Low Washer Fluid WarningLight ............................... 4-21

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHESYSTEM) ........................ 2-45

MMaintenance

Records ......................... 10-18Replacement Parts .......... 10-17

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids

and Lubricants ............ 10-15Scheduled Maintenance ..... 10-3

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 4-14Manual Mode ...................... 8-28Manual Transmission ............ 8-29

Fluid ............................... 9-14Mirrors

Folding ............................ 1-10Manual Rearview .............. 1-11Outlets ....................... 4-6, 4-7Power ............................. 1-10

Monitor System, TirePressure ......................... 9-50

MP3 ................................... 6-11

NNavigation System

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ................ 12-15

New Vehicle Break-In ........... 8-16

OOdometer ........................... 4-10

Trip ................................ 4-10Off-Road

Recovery .......................... 8-6Oil

Pressure Light .................. 4-19Oil, Engine ........................... 9-9Older Children, Restraints ...... 2-37Online Owner Center ............ 12-4OnStar® System .................. 4-23Operation, Infotainment

System ............................. 6-2Outlets

Power ........................ 4-6, 4-7Overheating, Engine ............. 9-23

i-6 INDEX

PPark

Shifting Into ..................... 8-20Shifting Out of .................. 8-22

Parking ............................... 8-22Brake .............................. 8-33Over Things That Burn ...... 8-23

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator .......................... 4-13

Passenger Compartment AirFilter ................................ 7-4

Passenger Sensing System ... 2-29Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 9-3Power

Door Locks ........................ 1-6Mirrors ............................ 1-10Protection, Battery .............. 5-5Retained

Accessory (RAP) ........... 8-18Steering Fluid ................... 9-24Windows ......................... 1-12

Power Steering Fluid ............ 9-24Pregnancy, Using Safety

Belts ............................... 2-20

PrivacyRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ..... 12-16Program

Courtesy Transportation ..... 12-8Proposition 65 Warning,

California .......................... 9-2

RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ......... 12-16Statement ...................... 12-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio .................... 6-4Reception .......................... 6-8Satellite ............................ 6-6

Reading Lamps ..................... 5-5Rear Seats ........................... 2-7Rear Window Washer/Wiper .... 4-6Rearview Mirrors .................. 1-11Reclining Seatbacks ............... 2-4Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ...................... 10-15Recommended Fuel ............. 8-39Records

Maintenance ................... 10-18Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 9-73

Reimbursement Program, GMMobility ........................... 12-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System ............................. 1-3

Replacement Bulbs .............. 9-37Replacement Parts

Airbags ........................... 2-36Replacement Parts,

Maintenance ................... 10-17Replacing Airbag System ...... 2-36Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash ........... 2-51Replacing Safety Belt System

Parts After a Crash ............ 2-22Reporting Safety Defects

General Motors ............... 12-14U.S. Government ............ 12-13

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .................... 8-18

Roadside AssistanceProgram .......................... 12-6

RoofSunroof ........................... 1-13

Roof Rack ............................ 3-5Rotation, Tires ..................... 9-55Routing, Engine Drive Belt .... 11-4Running the Vehicle While

Parked ............................ 8-24

INDEX i-7

SSafety Belts .......................... 2-8

Care ............................... 2-22Extender ......................... 2-21How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly ....................... 2-12Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 2-18Reminders ....................... 4-11Replacing After a Crash ..... 2-22Use During Pregnancy ...... 2-20

Safety Defects ReportingGeneral Motors ............... 12-14U.S. Government ............ 12-13

Safety Locks ......................... 1-6Safety System Check ........... 2-21Satellite Radio ....................... 6-6Satellite Radio Antenna .......... 6-9Scheduled Maintenance ........ 10-3Scheduling Appointments ....... 12-8Seats

Adjustment, Front ............... 2-4Folding Seatback ................ 2-6Head Restraints ................. 2-2Position, Front ................... 2-3Rear ................................. 2-7Reclining Seatbacks ............ 2-4

Securing ChildRestraints ................ 2-51, 2-53

SecurityLight ............................... 4-20Vehicle ............................. 1-7

ServiceAccessories and

Modifications .................. 9-3All-Wheel-Drive Light ......... 4-18Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-14Maintenance, General

Information ................... 10-1Parts Identification Label .... 11-1Publications Ordering

Information ................. 12-12Scheduling Appointments ... 12-8

Service and MaintenanceRecords ......................... 10-18

Service, Doing Your OwnWork ................................ 9-4

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle ............................ 2-34

ShiftingInto Park ......................... 8-20Out of Park ..................... 8-22

Signals, Turn andLane-Change ..................... 5-3

Spare TireCompact ......................... 9-68

Specifications andCapacities ....................... 11-2

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS)Warning Light ................... 4-18

Speedometer ....................... 4-10StabiliTrak System ................ 8-35StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 4-18Starter Switch Check ............ 9-30Starting the Engine .............. 8-18Steering ............................... 8-4

Fluid, Power .................... 9-24Steering Wheel Adjustment ..... 4-4Steering Wheel Controls ......... 4-4Storage Areas

Cargo Cover ...................... 3-2Cargo Management

System .......................... 3-4Center Console .................. 3-2Front ................................ 3-2Glove Box ......................... 3-1Roof Rack ......................... 3-5

Stuck Vehicle ...................... 8-11Sun Visors .......................... 1-12Sunroof .............................. 1-13Symbols ................................. iii

i-8 INDEX

TTachometer ......................... 4-10Taillamp Indicator Light ......... 4-21Taillamps ............................ 9-35Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 12-4Theft-Deterrent Systems ......... 1-9

Immobilizer ........................ 1-9Tire

Pressure ......................... 9-49Tires

Buying New Tires ............. 9-56Chains ............................ 9-61Changing ......................... 9-63Compact Spare ................ 9-68Designations .................... 9-46Different Size ................... 9-58If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 9-62Inflation Monitor System .... 9-52Inspection ........................ 9-54Pressure Light .................. 4-19Pressure Monitor System ... 9-50Rotation .......................... 9-55Sidewall Labeling .............. 9-44Terminology and

Definitions .................... 9-46Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 9-58

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 9-60Wheel Replacement .......... 9-60When It Is Time for New

Tires ............................ 9-56Towing

Driving Characteristics ....... 8-44Equipment ....................... 8-49General Information ........... 8-43Recreational Vehicle .......... 9-73Trailer ............................. 8-48Vehicle ............................ 9-73

TractionControl System (TCS) ....... 8-33Control System Warning

Light ............................ 4-19Trailer Towing ...................... 8-48Transmission

Automatic ................ 8-24, 8-27Fluid, Automatic ................ 9-12Fluid, Manual ................... 9-14

Transportation Program,Courtesy ......................... 12-8

Trip Odometer ..................... 4-10Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 5-3

UUniform Tire Quality

Grading ........................... 9-58Using this Manual .................... iii

VVehicle

Canadian Owners .................. iiControl ............................. 8-3Load Limits ...................... 8-12Personalization ................. 4-21Security ............................ 1-7Towing ............................ 9-73

Vehicle CareTire Pressure ................... 9-49

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ................... 11-1Service Parts Identification

Label ........................... 11-1Ventilation, Air ....................... 7-4Visors ................................. 1-12

INDEX i-9

WWarning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................... 4-8Warnings ................................ iii

Cautions and Danger ............ iiiHazard Flashers ................. 5-3

Washer Fluid ....................... 9-24Washer Fluid, Low Warning

Light ............................... 4-21Wheels

Alignment and TireBalance ....................... 9-60

Different Size ................... 9-58Replacement .................... 9-60

When It Is Time for NewTires ............................... 9-56

Where to Put the ChildRestraint ......................... 2-43

Windows ............................. 1-11Power ............................. 1-12

WindshieldWiper/Washer .................... 4-5

Winter Driving ....................... 8-9Wiper Blade Replacement ..... 9-30Wipers

Rear Washer ..................... 4-6

i-10 INDEX

Documents

2010 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2010 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M. Wheels and Tires ..... 9-43 Jump Starting ... of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division wherever